Home

KROME Operation Guide

1. 1 Volume VOLUME knob This knob adjusts the volume of the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R outputs as well as the volume of the headphone jack See page 15 2 SW1 2 and Joystick SW1 and SW2 These buttons are used to control the programs or effect parameters or to turn the joystick lock function on off See page 24 Joystick You can control synthesis parameters or effect parameters by moving the joystick up down left right See page 24 3 REALTIME CONTROLS These realtime controllers consist of four knobs and one button You can use them to do the following things e Control the sound and effects of programs and combinations e Control the arpeggiator SELECT button knobs 1 4 Use the SELECT button to select the functions controlled by knobs 1 4 By using knobs 1 4 you can control the sound effects and arpeggiator For details please see Realtime control knobs on page 25 10 12 The diagram shown is for KROME 61 For details please see Using realtime controls to edit the sound or effects on page 28 4 Arpeggiator ARP button This button turns the arpeggiator on off The button will be lit if the arpeggiator is on
2. o O O o O O O O Oo C064 bg wD C064 C064 by bee C064 Volume O my Balance d 1 Goad Coed arg T os eg a F T 2 In the display press the timbre 1 volume slider and slide it up or down to adjust the volume You can also highlight the numerical area of the slider and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to adjust the value If you check Hold Balance moving any one of the volume sliders volume values will cause the volume of the other timbres to change as well maintaining the relative volume balance between timbres 1 16 This is a convenient way to adjust the overall volume Adjusting the panning of each timbre 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Mixer T01 08 page 2 Press the timbre 1 pan knob and slide it left right to adjust the panning You can also highlight the numerical area of the knob and use the VALUE dial or the numeric keys to adjust the value Timbre pan interacts with the pan stored in the Program A setting of C064 reproduces the Program s oscillator pan settings Adjusting the Timbre Pan will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan relationship between the oscillators A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right Detailed Editing with Combinations Simple editing using the knobs Simple editing using the knobs You can use the Control Surface to perform a variety of edits For example you can use the control s
3. Bank and number select pad visible allowing you to enter the value using a value PE Bye x controller such as the numeric keys TONE CUTOFF 817 cE 7 8 8 Note If you don t want the realtime control popup to e appear clear the REALTIME CONTROL Pop Up check box in the menu located in Global PO Basic Setup System Preferences o Ent e BANK Selects the program or combination bank e For other functions see Numerical input pad Basic Information About the KROME s modes Basic Information About the KROME s modes The KROME has numerous functions that let you play and edit programs or combinations record and play back sequence data and manage media These functions are grouped into modes The KROME has five modes Program mode Programs are the basic sounds of KROME In Program mode you can e Select and play Programs e Use one arpeggiator in your performance e Play back Drum Track patterns while you perform using a Program e Edit Programs You can use the realtime controls and the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the program You can adjust the parameters and settings of the oscillators filters amps EGs LFOs effects arpeggi ator drum track etc You can use up to five insert effects two master effects and one total effect Plus you can create drum programs using drum kits as created in Global mode
4. If you access this menu from Global or Media mode it will include an item named Return If you press Return you will return to the mode where you were before selecting Global or Media mode Mode menu When selected in Program Combination or Sequencer mode When selected in Global or Media mode PROGRAM EOMBINATFION Gees SEQUENCER GLOBAL PROGRAM COMBINATION SEQUENCER 6I OBAl r ass MEDIA MEDIA Return Close b Current page This indicates the current page within the selected mode Beginning on the left this area shows the mode button page number name and tab name Mode button Page number and name Tab name oo re 6 CVT c Tab Most pages are divided into two or more tabs d Parameters The parameters for various settings are shown in the display e Edit cell When you touch a parameter in the display the parameter or parameter value will usually be highlighted displayed in reverse highlighting This is called the edit cell and the highlighted item will be available for editing Use a value controller such as the VALUE dial see page 2 to edit the value Alternatively you can edit the value by pressing the edit cell and using your finger to drag in the direction of the triangles that appear The shading of the triangles will change in three levels this function will become available when the darkest shading is reached i D In addition you can
5. RIN mode that is E selected at Power On Mode Reset powemon Auto Power Off 4 hours Beep setting m Beep Enable m Value Edit Pop up m Animation m REALTIME Pop up Memory Protect Memory _ Program C Drum Kit protect settings L Combination C ARP User Pattern _ Song 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup System Preferences page 2 If the Power On Mode is set to Reset factory setting KROME will automatically select the Program mode P0 Play If the Power On Mode is set to Memorize the location mode and page and the program or combination number that had been selected when you turned off the power will be recalled Enabling a beep tone when the display is pressed 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup System Preferences page 2 If the Beep Enable check box is selected a beep tone will sound when you press an object in the display Clear the check box if you don t want a beep to sound Protecting the memory 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup System Preferences page 2 If a Memory Protect check box is selected the corresponding write data load or song recording operation will be disabled thus protecting the contents of memory Global settings MIDI Settings Other screen display settings Edit pad function and animation You can keep the edit pad see page 4 or realtime control popup see page 6 from appearing and d
6. Using the keyboard to enter a note number or velocity value By playing a key while pressing a parameter that specifies a note number such as G4 or C 2 or a velocity value you can directly enter that note number or velocity value This is not available in menu command dialog boxes Tempo input TEMPO knob TAP button You can set the tempo by turning the TEMPO knob or by repeatedly pressing the TAP button COMPARE button You can use this button to return the settings of an edited program combination or song to their original state Refer to the following section Compare function Program Combination mode Use this when you wish to compare the edits you have made to a program or combination s sound with the un edited original i e the sound that is written into memory When editing a program or combination press this button The LED will light up and the last written settings for that program or combination number will be recalled When you press the COMPARE button once again the LED will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing 1 When editing a program or combination press this button The LED will light up and the last written settings for that program number or combination number will be recalled 2 Press the COMPARE button once again Note The LED will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing If you edit the settings that are recalled by
7. amp The Compare function that lets you return to the state prior to your editing or undo edits is not available in Global mode You can adjust the transposition over a range of 1 octave 3 Use the Global mode P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page Convert Position parameter to specify the position at which the transpose and velocity curve settings will be applied PreMIDI is the normal setting With this setting the Transpose setting described above and the Velocity Curve described below will be applied to the KROME s keyboard performance data and will affect both the MIDI OUT and the internal sound generator This is also required in order to record the output of the curves into the internal sequencer PostMIDI applies the transposition and curves to incoming MIDI for adjusting the KROME response to an external MIDI controller When simply playing the internal sounds from the KROME keyboard both settings work the same Adjusting the keyboard response Velocity curve let you adjust the way the KROME responds to how you play on the keyboard The default setting should work for most players but there are many other choices to let you customize the response to match your own style To set the velocity and after touch curves 1 In Global mode go to P0 Basic Setup Basic page 2 Set the Velocity Curve to suit your playing style Velocity Curve 4 is the default and should work for most players 109 110 Adjusting Globa
8. gt PG p 57 p 58 p 96 p 98 p 148 p 149 MIDI The KROME does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly gt p 20 Are the KROME s receive settings such as the global MIDI channel and the timbre track s receive channel set to match the channels of the transmitting device gt PG p 360 The KROME does not respond correctly to in coming MIDI data Are the Global P1 MIDI settings MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Enable Bank Change Enable Control Change Enable AfterTouch and Enable Exclusive each checked gt PG p 200 Does the KROME support the types of messages that are being sent to it gt PG p 360 Can t recall programs of the desired bank Is the Bank Map setting correct gt PG p 196 Damper pedal Damper response is wrong Execute the menu command Half Damper Calibration Global PO Basic Setup to correctly calibrate the half damper pedal sensitivity gt PG p 217 Troubleshooting Effects Media Can t format the SD card Does the media meet the requirements for use on the KROME gt p 118 Is the media inserted correctly gt p 118 Could the media s Lock write protect switch be on Can t save load data on the SD card Is the media inserted correctly gt p 118 Has the media been formatted gt p 123 Could the media s Lock write protect switch be on The date of the data is wrong The files you saved have the in
9. Combination mode Combinations are sets of up to 16 programs that can be played simultaneously letting you create sounds that are more complex than a single Program In Combination mode you can e Select and play Combinations e Use multiple timbres to play arpeggio patterns generated by two arpeggiators e Use one or more timbres to play back the patterns in the drum track e Use the KROME as a 16 track multitimbral tone generator e Edit Combinations You can use the tone adjust function to easily edit the program of each timbre You can assign Programs to each of the 16 Timbres each with separate volume pan EQ and keyboard and velocity zones make settings for effects arpeg giator drum track Plus you can use up to five insert effects two mas ter effects and one total effect Sequencer mode Sequencer mode lets you record playback and edit MIDI tracks You can e Use the sixteen track MIDI sequencer to record and play back songs Record a single MIDI track at a time or record as many as all sixteen tracks simultaneously You can also record exclusive messages e Use multiple tracks to record and play back performances generated by two arpeggiators e Use one or more tracks to play back the patterns in the drum track e Edit songs e Use the KROME as a 16 part multi timbral sound module e GM GM2 playback is also supported e Use the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the program of
10. Introduction to the KROME Objects in the display The KROME uses Korg s TouchView graphical user interface By pressing or dragging objects shown in the display you can select programs or combinations or edit parameter values Here we ll explain the names and functions of these objects a Mode button g Check boxes I Stopwatch button k Menu command button b Current page COMBI j Popup button 2 A gt 000 Piano amp Strings X 120 00 O1 AOOO KROME Grand Piano m Auto Load BYN osc 1 05 Rel 00 Timhra TWI G i Popup button 1 1 E E 4 S 7 E 1 2 1 2 1 MS Fit Fit Flt Trsp Trsp Tune Tune DK Fe r Reso EG I 7 A 00 0000 0000 PROG 00 00 itch 1 F 1A 1 Fit Flt Flt re Oifoia LEON drivel O Eca Oech Ecs Flt EGR p 00 00 00 00 e Edit cell f Sliders and knobs d Parameters c Tab h Toggle buttons a Mode button This indicates the mode that s currently selected When you press this button the Mode menu will appear In the mode menu press the name of the mode that you want to move If you select the currently selected mode the Page Select menu for that mode will appear Even in another mode pressing the right side of the name will display the Page Select menu for each mode To close the menu press the Close button or the EXIT button
11. Note Pitch EG is shared by OSC1 and OSC2 Effects As effects you can use five insert effects two master effects and one total effect The output of OSC 1 2 is sent to these effect processors By choosing the desired effect for each processor and editing its parameters you can apply a wide range of effects such as modulation distortion and reverberation Arpeggiator A program can use one arpeggiator You can select an arpeggio pattern specify the range that the pattern will be developed within and specify the range of notes or velocities that will trigger the arpeggiator Controllers P1 3 Arpeggio P7 1 2 Master Effect Routing P8 1 1 2 P9 Insert Total Effect Effect j 1 5 P8 P9 AUDIO OUTPUT oSC1 2 L MONO R Insert Effects Master Effects FX Control Bus OSC Pitch A Filter A Amplifier A 10 gt Laa Eff ES _______ _ ___ gt gt P1 1 P2 2 etc indicate the on screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME 31 32 Playing and editing Programs An overview of the edit pages In order to do detailed editing you ll need to access the edit pages in the display The preceding section Easy Program editing on page 27 explained how to use the Prog P0 Play page to do simple editing For more detailed editing you ll use the P1 and following edit pages Select and
12. You can adjust a mid sweepable three band EQ in the Prog P0 Play Main page Note This EQ will affect both oscillator 1 and oscillator 2 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Main page 2 On the display select the EQ gain knob or the center frequency of the Mid sweep EQ that you want to edit 3 Use the VALUE controllers e g VALUE dial to edit the value You can also edit the value by dragging left or right on a knob or edit cell in the display Category gt 00 Keyboard J 109 00 Bank A 1000 KROME Grand Piano USER CONTROLS 1 F A Attack 064 2 Knob Mod 2 3 No Effect 3 Knob Mod 3 4 No Effect 4 Knob Mod 4 5 No Effect 2 10k MSHS Blas RETURN gt 1 Stereo Chorus YS SA mS BESeoel 03 5 020 035 MIZ RALEA A i STE Octave Down STC PESAT bony Mixer Tone moin ed ae EQ IFX1 St Graphic 7EQ 2 St Exciter Enhner Easy Program editing Adjusting the EQ Adjusting the volume balance A program s sound consists of up to two oscillators which are played mainly from the keyboard and one drum track which automatically plays the rhythm section The volumes of the oscillators and the drum track can be adjusted in the Prog P0 Play Mixer amp Drum Track page Note There s also a mute function which individually silences these and a solo function which mutes all sounds other than the specified one 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Mixer amp
13. 0 High Damp 7 Low Damp Input Level D mod 0 Src O Spread 50 Wet Dry 50 50 Sre off Amt 0 In addition we can use Dmod to change the feed back level via SW1 5 In the P1 Basic Controllers Controllers Setup page set the SW1 function to SW1 Mod CC 80 and the Mode to Toggle Choose P8 Routing IFX IFX1 page Set the Feedback Src to SW1 80 and set Amt to 30 COMBI AMALAT LDS Rsi v IO MI ch OGch P BPM MIDI Time Over L Delay Base Note f Times x3 Level 20 C Delay Base Note J Times x1 Level 20 R Delay Base Note D Times x1 Level 20 Feedback C Delay 10 Src off Amt High Damp 7 Low Damp Input Level D mod Sro Js Y 01 Spread 50 Wet Dry 50 50 Src off Amt 0 When you move the joystick away from yourself and press the SW1 button the feedback level will increase and the delay sound will continue for a longer time The Amt setting specifies the feedback level that will be in effect when the SW1 button is pressed If Amt is set to 10 pressing the SW1 button will reduce the feedback level to 0 Finally we can use the MIDI Tempo Sync function to synchronize the delay time to the arpeggiator tempo 6 Set BPM to MIDI 7 For L C and R set the Delay Base Note and Times as desired For this example set Delay Base Note to J and Times to x1 so that the effect will be easily
14. 1 Move to the Bank A directory and select the Combination that you want to load PCG file Combinations Bank A The procedure is as follows e Perform steps 1 3 under Loading all Programs Combinations Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns on page 120 Select the PCG file containing the data you want to load it will be highlighted and press the Open button e Press Combinations to highlight it and press the Open button e Press Bank A to highlight it and press the Open button e Press the scroll bar to find the Combination you want to load and highlight it Alternatively you could select any file since the desired file can be selected later from the dialog box MEDIA Rr v iG NEWFILE PCG Combinations Bank A 000 Piano amp Str 881 AppoloKeys 3K 01 02 2012 00 00 00 3K 01 02 2012 00 00 00 002 Heaven Pad 01 02 2012 00 00 00 003 Piano amp Yox 3K 01 02 2012 00 00 00 E 3K 01 02 2012 00 00 00 004 Film Piano SD Card NEW VOLUME Up Liew ane oa TT Note When you press the keyboard of the KROME you will hear the combination you have selected However the internal programs will be used as the program of each timbre Loading data Loading data from SD card Media Load 2 Press the Load button Alternatively choose the menu command Load Selected A dialog box will appear Combination A002 Heaven Pad To Combination gt Ma adore AALL
15. BTH BTH BTH OBTH OBTH OBTH OBTIH BTH Portamento PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG Force OSC Mode If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound monophonically set this either to MN Mono or LGT Legato Conversely set this to Poly if you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically Normally this should be set to PRG so that the sound will play as set by the original Program For details please see Force OSC Mode on page 82 of the Parameter Guide OSC Select If the timbre is using a Program where the Oscillator Mode is Double or Double Drums and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to OSC1 only OSC1 will sound or OSC2 only OSC2 will sound Normally this should be set to BTH Both Portamento If the Program uses portamento but you d like to disable this for the current Combination set this parameter to Off Conversely if you want to force the portamento to be on or just to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 The portamento will change to use the newly specified time Normally this should be set to PRG Timbre Parameters Pitch P3 Timbre Param Pitch T 1 08 v IO AOOO Piano amp Strings J 120 00 T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard ld Transpose 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 Detune Use BPM Adjust in Menu 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
16. Cancel OK 3 Use the Combination upper line to select the load source combination and use To Combination lower line to specify the destination combination For this example select D000 You can press the popup button and select from a menu or use the BANK buttons and numeric keys to make a selection 4 Press the OK button to execute loading the loaded combination will be assigned to D000 Loading songs for use in Sequencer mode SNG As an example here we will explain how to load a song We ll assume that this song uses edited programs multisamples you sampled and programs that use drumkit and user arpeggio patterns etc In such cases it is best to load all data 1 Perform steps 1 3 under Loading all Programs Combinations Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns on page 120 Select the SNG file containing the data you want to load it will be highlighted 2 Press the Load button Alternatively choose the menu command Load Selected A dialog box will appear m Load NEWFILE PCG too Select SNG Allocation Append Clear OK Cancel Note The contents and settings of the dialog box will differ depending on the type of file that you are loading 3 Check the Load PCG too check box When you execute loading the PCG file will be loaded along with the SNG file Use Select SNG Allocation to specify the destination to which the song
17. Note You can use SW1 2 as alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation sources to control program parameters or effect parameters To do so you will normally assign SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 Mod CC 81 For an example of assigning the SW1 button as an effect dynamic modulation source for a program and using it to control an effect see page 82 For a complete list of the possible assignments see page 348 of the Parameter Guide Note If you want to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them see page 116 41 42 Playing and editing Programs Setting the functions of Realtime Controls USER knobs 1 4 When the Realtime controls is set to USER the four knobs on the right function as Realtime knobs 1 4 These can perform a number of different functions such as modulating sounds or effects adjusting effects send levels and so on Each Program Combination and Song stores its own settings for what the knobs will do When using the sliders for AMS or Dmod it s important to understand that creating an assignment is a two step process First you assign the knob to send a MIDI controller such as Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Second you assign that MIDI controller to modulate one or more Program or effects parameters For the first part of the above use the mode s Controllers Setup page See Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 above The default assignments for knobs 1 4 are Kn
18. Pan oo9ooogoogoogooog C064 C064 RND C064 C064 C064 C064 C064 Volume L Hold Balance I F F 095 100 100 100 100 074 045 031 Prog Prog Mixer ARP ARP Tone 1 8 9 16 1 8 A B Adjust Selecting a parameter and editing the value 1 Press the parameter that you want to edit 2 If you select an edit cell the display will be highlighted Edit the value e The way that the value will change depends on the type of parameter or object See Objects in the display on page 4 The value in the edit cell can be edited by using the value controllers VALUE dial INC DEC buttons numeric keys 0 9 button button ENTER but ton etc 3 You can use knobs 1 4 to edit parameters that are assigned to the control surface Note You can use the COMPARE button to compare the sound you re editing with the original unedited sound INC DEC buttons Use these when you wish to make small changes in the value VALUE dial Use this dial to edit the selected parameter s value This control is convenient when you want to scroll through a very long list of selections Numeric keys 0 9 ENTER button button button These buttons are convenient when you know the exact value that you want to enter Use the 0 9 and decimal buttons to enter the value and then press the ENTER button to confirm the entry The button inverts the sign
19. Pattern Name Seq P11 menu command Rename ji eee Cue List Program category b aego Global P4 Program Category Combination category sub category Global P4 Combination Category Global P5 menu command ANAE Rename Drum Kit Global P6 menu command Arpeggio Pattern Rename Arpeggio Pattern Media Save Save All Save Exclusive Media Utility menu command Rename Create Directory Format Seq PO P11 Save Songs and Cue Lists Data Prog Combi Seq P8 9 menu command Write FX Preset 1 In the pages listed above or after selecting a menu command in these pages press the text edit button T to access the text edit dialog box Effect preset Character Set Selects Text Cursor the type of character KROME Grand Piano C Symbol Character buttons 1 je 3 4 5 6 B S O0 q W e r t g u i Oo P ais d f js jh Jj k il Zz x C U b M Mp h J7 Shift button Switches between Delete Cancel lowercase characters Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Cursor buttons Move the cursor to left or right Cancel button OK button that you input press the OK uppercase and If you are satisfied with the text Space button Insert a space at the cursor location Clear button Delete all characters of the text button If you wish to discard box press the Cancel button yo
20. Rec Mute settings amp The SOLO setting is not stored when you save the song 55 56 Creating songs Sequencer mode Exclusive Solo Exclusive Solo is a function that limits the Solo function described above to a single track at a time If Exclusive Solo is on only the track for which Solo was last turned on will be played other tracks will always be silent Use the Exclusive Solo menu command to specify how the Solo function will function Exclusive Solo off You will be able to solo more than one track at a time The status of a track will change each time you press its Solo On Off button Exclusive Solo on When you press a Solo On Off button only that track will be soloed Tip You can turn Exclusive Solo on off by holding down the ENTER button and pressing numeric key 1 Loop playback When recording or playing back a song you can loop individual tracks that are playing In the P0 1 Play Loop T01 08 or T09 16 page check Track Play Loop for the tracks you want to loop and use Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to specify the starting and ending measure of the region that will play back as a loop If you check Play Intro the measures preceding the loop will be played back as an introduction before the loop begins SEQ HAEA Play Loop T 1 8 v_ 16 G6 1 61 600 Meter 4 4 J 118 08 Manual S004 NEW SONG Track 3 MIDI TRACK 3 T 2 AQ 11 MG Funk Bass 1 Resolutio
21. T 1 E 91 Basic Kit1 Ch 61 RPPR NoAssign FRO To END of MEASURE 001 4 5 5 m MEASURE 001 1 a Setup 4 While continuing to press drag to the move destination track and release T01 E091 Basic Kiti Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign FROM MEASURE O01 1 a To END of MEASURE 001 4 5 A 4 5 I Oo 1 4 m 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 le le B Fale Setup 4 If the move destination measures contain events the Drag Move dialog box will appear Overwrite will overwrite the source data over the destination data replacing the destination data with the source data Merge will combine the source and destination data Press the OK button to execute the move If there are no events in the move destination measures this dialog box will not appear the move will occur immediately T 2 A000 KROME Grand Piano FROM MEASURE 001 1 a z Ch 02 RPPR NoAssign To END of MEASURE 001 4 5 1 q Ta 8 10 11 12 13 14 1S 16 m Setup le e E Fez Example Copying the events of measures 1 2 to measures 3 4 1 Press the wl tool 2 Drag over measures 1 2 to specify the edit region 1 T 1 E091 Basic Kit1 Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign J l FROM MEASURE 001 To END of MEASURE 001 1 4 5 5 Ai 4 C g 5 gt aa F 2 Setup al
22. e SN ae 00101360 lt n Rest button 001 02 000 C4 key 001 02 240 4 Rest button 001 02 360 C4 C4 key 001 03 120 D3 D3 key 001 03 240 Eb3 Eb3 key 001 04 000 E E3 key 001 04 240 F3 key 002 01 000 Rest button 002 01 120 C3 C3 key 002 01 360 Rest button 002 02 000 eee F2 key 002 02 240 i Tie button 002 03 000 cee F2 key 002 03 240 EA Rest button 002 03 360 A2 A2 key 002 04 000 A3 A3 key 002 04 240 j Rest button 002 04 360 1 Specify a bass program for track 02 Use Track Select to select track 02 and verify that you hear a bass program 2 Access the P6 Track Edit Track Edit page e Z7 m JIA wlwl D ola a gt gt Sh wlrpl sf wla tN Restbutton 001 02 000__ pod Caky ont 702 240 _ SN Restbutton 001 02 360__ poh Caky ont 703 120 D3ke y 001 703 240 po Eb3key 001 04 000__ A Eske 001 0424 A Fake 002 07 000__ Restbutton 002 01 120 s A Shey 002701 360 S Restbutton 002 02 000__ pod Fzkey 002 0224 Tiebutton 002 03 000 A Fzkey 002 0324 Restbutton 002 03 360__ d Akey 002 04 000 Akey 002 0424 A Restbutton 002 04360 61 62 Creating songs Sequencer mode 3 Set From Measure to 001 With this setting
23. gt 81 M0001 S001 INTRO x01 m S 2 M0009 S002 VERSE x02 U 03 M0041 S003 CHORUS x 81 L 04 M0057 End 05 pa Insert Cut Copy Step 1 7 When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt E buttonh playback will begin from the step that is specified as the Current Step Meter 4 4 J 100 00 Auto gt 1C00 NEW CUELIST 00 Track 1 Drums1 E091 Basic Kit STEP 62 03 SONG 002 VERSE Length 016 Step Measure Song Repeat Load FX 1 M0001 S001 INTRO x 01 m lt gt 2 M0009 S002 VERSE x 2 O gt 83 M0041 S003 CHORUS x 81 gt 84 M0057 End 5 Insert Cut Copy F Step 02 Song Position Bar e Step The arrow will indicate the step that s currently playing indicates the currently selected Step The Song Position Bar located below the song name shows the progression of the song within the step While stopped you can specify the Current Step and the display will change accordingly e M Indicates the starting measure of that step e Meter Indicates the currently playing time signature This cannot be changed e The name of a cue list can be specified by the Rename Cue List menu command e When you play the keyboard the program of the track selected by Track Select will sound If a different program is selected for each song the program that s specifi
24. move the switch back to its original unprotected setting Inserting a card e Insert an SD card in the SD card slot With the card label facing upward insert the connector end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until you hear a click SD card slot SD card amp Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when you insert it Forcing it in the wrong direction may damage the slot or the card and the data may be lost Removing a card amp Never remove an SD card from the slot while loading saving or formatting is in progress e Remove the card from the SD card slot Press the card inward you will hear a click and the card will pop out part way allowing you to pull it completely out Refer to the owner s manual included with your card and observe the guidelines for handling and use Formatting media Some consumer electronics products that use SD cards utilize their own proprietary format Before using an SD card with the KROME you must format it on the KROME see page 123 How to save data As an example here we ll execute Save All to save the PCG and SNG files Save All saves all internal memory Programs Combinations Global settings Drum Kits User Arpeggio Patterns and Drum Track User Patterns to media as a PCG file It also saves songs and cue lists as a SNG file This method is available only if the current directory is a DOS directory amp If you sav
25. of the parameter value the decimal button inserts a decimal for entering fractional values Note When selecting Program Select see page 21 you can select a GM bank by holding down the 0 button and pressing the 1 9 or buttons Functions that use the ENTER button in conjunc tion with another button ENTER has a few special functions when it is pressed in combination with other buttons By holding down the ENTER button while you press a numeric key 0 9 you can select up to ten menu commands from within the current page While a dialog box is displayed the ENTER button corresponds to the OK button The EXIT button corresponds to the Cancel button In Sequencer mode you can hold down the ENTER button and press the LOCATE I button to use the menu command Set Location Other Specifying a program bank or combination bank PROG BANK A B C D E F COMBI BANK A B C D buttons Use these buttons to change banks when selecting Programs or Combinations The LEDs in the buttons light up to show the current bank In Program mode these buttons select the Program bank In Combination mode these buttons have two functions e When you re selecting Combinations they choose the Combination bank e When you re assigning a Program to a timbre within the Combination they select the Program bank In Sequencer mode when a track s Program name is selected these buttons change the Program bank
26. p 152 Could the total polyphony be exceeding the maximum polyphony of 120 voices gt p 32 Notes do not stop In Prog P1 Basic Controllers Note On Scale select the Program Basic page make sure that the Hold check box is unchecked gt PG p 14 Did you use Tone Adjust to turn Hold on gt PG p 10 In Global P2 Controller make sure that Damper Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly gt PG p 202 If the DRUM TRACK or ARP buttons are turned on try turning them off Notes are sounded in duplicate Is Local Control turned Off e Clear the Local Control On checkbox Global P1 MIDI gt PG p 198 Noise or oscillation is heard When using the MIDI Tempo Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction Some effects such as 019 Stereo Analog Record generate noise intentionally It is also possible to create oscillation using a filter with resonance These are not malfunctions Note that if you use the following effects with the routing described below a feedback loop will be created possibly producing a loud noise Please use caution If the signal from an oscillator or timbre track output or the signal after an insert effect is sent to the FX Control bus and that signal is output directly with this output sent to the FX Control bus a loud noise may be output It is also po
27. phasers etc Normally the phase of the LFOs of multiple modulation type effects will not be synchronized even if you set them to the identical Frequency since the LFOs are being generated independently However if you select Common 1 or Common 2 for the LFO Type parameter of a modulation type effect the effect will use the one of the common LFOs instead of its own individual LFO This allows you to use a single Common FX LFO to control two or more modulation type effects such as flanger phaser or auto pan with the same phase Since you can make independent settings for LFO waveform and phase offset for each effect you are free to create complex combinations of effects Common FX LFO LFO Type Common1 Common FX LFO1 Stereo Flanger Frequency Hz AA i ey Waveform Triangle Reset Generate original LFO waveform Phase Offset 0 deg Stereo Phaser A Waveform Sine Phase Offset 0 deg Stereo Auto Pan IV I Waveform Sine Phase Offset 90 deg Dynamic modulation Common FX LFO Common FX LFO 83 84 Using Effects Arpeggiator function Using the arpeggiator while you play The arpeggiator is a function that automatically generates arpeggios patterns of individual notes derived from a chord Most arpeggiators produce an arpeggio when you play a chord on the keyboard The chord you played on the keyboard is sounded as an arpeggio broken chord The KROME s arpeggiator is also polyphonic and
28. pitch LFO and master effect send level In USER the most useful functions are assigned individually for each preload program The table below shows the standard assignments of the Realtime Controls knobs Knob WIDICC Normally controis For details please see page 16 of the Parameter Guide ARP controls In the ARP section you can control the arpeggiator in realtime For details on functionality please see page 86 Saving the edits you made by moving the knobs The realtime control knobs are an ideal way to modify the sound while you perform As needed press the front panel WRITE button to Write the Program into memory and save the sound you ve edited See Saving your edits on page 30 amp However for Realtime Controls USER knobs 1 4 the edited settings can be saved only if you ve assigned CC 70 79 Internally a single knob usually affects several different parameters When you write a Program the edits are saved into the individual program parameters and not to the knob itself After writing the Program you ll notice that the knobs have returned to their center positions since the old edited values are now the new saved values Assigning Realtime Controls USER functions to knobs 1 4 You can assign the functions that knobs 1 4 will perform when Realtime Controls USER is selected See page 41 Easy Program editing Using Tone Adjust Using Tone Adjust The Tone Adju
29. velocities and control changes in the piano roll screen By selecting and dragging events in the screen you can edit their pitch or timing or delete or add events Erase Track This command erases the data from the specified track It is not possible to erase the master track by itself Copy Track This command copies musical data from the copy source track to the specified track Bounce Track This command combines the musical data of the bounce source and bounce destination tracks and places the combined data in the bounce destination All musical data in the bounce source will be erased Erase Measure This command erases the specified type s of musical data from the specified range of measures The Erase Measure command can also be used to remove only a specific type of data Unlike the Delete Measure command executing the Erase Measure command does not cause the subsequent measures of musical data to be moved forward Delete Measure This command deletes the specified measures When the Delete Measure command is executed the musical data following the deleted measures will be moved towards the beginning of the sequence Insert Measure This command inserts the specified number of measures into the specified track When you execute the Insert Measure command the musical data following the insert location will be moved backward Repeat Measure This command repeatedly inserts the specified measures for the specified
30. 101 of the Parameter Guide 5 The KROME will automatically enter record ready mode and the metronome will sound according to the Metronome setting See page 119 of the Parameter Guide 6 Press the START STOP gt W button to begin realtime recording To stop recording press the START STOP p gt W button once again 59 60 Creating songs Sequencer mode Recording MIDI in real time When you ve finished with Preparations for recording you can start recording This is a method of recording what you re playing on the keyboard and your controller usage in real time This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the Drum Track function the RPPR function and the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you play back existing sequence data on an external sequencer and record it onto KROME s sequencer in real time Recording setup In PO Play REC Preferences page Recording Setup select the realtime recording method you want to use Overwrite By default this recording method is selected This will record your performance by overwriting any previously recorded data All data following the measure where you start recording will be erased Nor
31. 2 3 Press the il tool 4 Press measure 3 the copy destination measure Alternatively drag the edit region to measure 3 T 1 E091 Basic Kit1 Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign i FROM MEASURE 001 To END of MEASURE 002 1 2a 4 5 5 ht 2 g EE E lz F ci E gt Setup 69 70 Creating songs Sequencer mode The copy will be executed T 1 E 91 Basic Kit Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign 1 FROM MEASURE 003 To END of MEASURE 004 4 i z a 5 z te g PEN i E i cm Setup J Q 5 5 If desired you can press another copy destination to copy the data repeatedly Example Copying the data of an entire track You can copy the data of an entire track to another track Refer to Example Moving the data of an entire track In step 2 choose the ij tool Note events Note view area SS 4 E A a as cq Note view area select Say Select what will be a shown in the control c3 view area In this C example velocity values Ctrl 4 5 are shown Vel Control view area __ Meas 005 00002 Event list M 005 002 BT 02 089 G 4 Setup Undo cancels the preceding edit Redo returns to the state prior to Undo The Piano Roll Setup dialog box will appear when you press the Setup button gt see Piano Roll Setup SGEN e a a view ZJ j xd _Play
32. 31 An overview of the edit pages 0008 32 Basic oscillator SCttingS ccc ccc eee ee 32 Creating time varying changes LFO and EG 35 Diverse modulation settings AMS and AMS mixer 0 ccc eee ee ee ees 36 Controlling Pitches Sots os twetonesandegdeeae stone 37 USMO FIRE tenier EEE UREE EEEREN 38 Using the Amp section 0c ccc eee eee 40 Making controller assignments 00065 41 Arpeggiator settings cece ccc cence eens 42 Drum Track SettingS ccc ccc eee ee eee 42 ECCS a cana tarot E E AES eae ea E E 42 Automatically importing a Program into Sequence MOE cece ccc cee eee es 42 Playing and editing Combinations 43 Playing combinations cccccecceecs 43 Selecting Combinations 0c cece eee ees 43 Using controllers to modify the sound 45 Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track 45 Easy Combination editing sseeee 46 Changing the program of each timbre 46 Adjusting the MiX ccc cece cece eee eens 46 Simple editing using the knobs 47 Saving a Combination you ve edited 47 Detailed Editing with Combinations 47 A suggested approach for editing 48 Restoring edited settingS ccc eee 48 Layers Splits and Velocity Switches 48 MIDI SENOS 4 4 viewleaeetuces caeduyeyqee eo aves 50 Altering Program
33. 882 St BPMAutoPanDly MFX12MFX2 MX a ses ae Chain Level 127 0 0604 Multiband Limiter 20 1 Stereo Compressor A Arn 7x A 13 In MFX1 and MFX2 select the type of each master effect The procedure is the same as when selecting an insert effect see step 6 Note You can only select a double size effect for MEX1 For details please see Double size effects above 14 Press the On Off button to turn on the master effect Each time you press this button the master effect will toggle on off When Off the output of the master effect will be muted 15 Use Return 1 and Return 2 to adjust the output levels of the master effects Note For each effect the Wet value of the Wet Dry parameter is the output level of the effect The return value is multiplied with this Return 127 will be x1 0 to determine the actual output level of the master effect 16 Select the MFX1 and MFX2 pages and set the parameters for each selected effect For details on the Program Effects settings step 10 Total Effect 17 If you use Bus IFX Output Select to choose L R as the oscillator output or if you set the post IFX Bus to L R the signal will be input to the total effect The output from the master effect is input to the total effect via the Return 1 and Return 2 settings of the Prog P9 MEX TFX LFO Routing page After being processed through the total effect the signal is output from the
34. A004 Reed EP 200A Wah Knob3 A026 German Grand Reverb nuts AQG6 Clav Register AD A027 German New Age Grand 26 adwind A020 KORNOS German Grand A028 Comp Grand Mono eer A021 German Dark Grand A029 Acoustic Piano 68 Bass Syn lt 4 Jump to Sub Find Cancel OK In the illustration above the Keyboard category is selected The menu in the center column area shows the Programs which belong to that category 2 Press the tabs to the left and right of the display to select a different category The name of the selected category will be displayed in full in the top right hand corner 3 Press one of the program names in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted and the program will change Alternatively you can use the INC DEC buttons to switch programs Touch the scroll ribbon at the bottom of the screen to see all of the Programs in that category Play the keyboard or press a chord trigger button to hear the program you selected 4 If you want to select from a sub category press the Jump to Sub button to access the Sub Category Prog Select menu Press the left tabs to select a sub category Note You can t select tabs for a sub category that has no associated programs Select a program as described in step 3 above Press the OK button to confirm your selection or press the Cancel button to discard it You will return to the main category 5 Whe
35. C Can t calibrate Meaning Calibration could not be performed correctly e Try again Can t copy swap double size effect Meaning When copying or swapping an insertion effect or master effect you attempted to place a double size effect in IFX5 and MFX2 e Modify your settings so that a double size effect is not moved to IFX5 or MFX2 and execute again Can t open pattern Continue Meaning When you finished recording there was not enough memory to open the pattern that was put into the track When it must be opened automatically If you press the OK button the pattern data will be deleted and the recorded or edited content will be saved If you press the Cancel button the recorded content will be discarded Completed Meaning The processing executed by the command has been completed Completed Please turn the power off and then on again Meaning Execution of Update System Software has been completed successfully Turn the power switch off and then on again to complete the update D Destination and source are identical Meaning When copying or bouncing the same song track or pattern was selected for both the source and destination To solve this problem e Select a different song track or pattern for the source and destination Destination from measure within the limits of source Meaning When executing the Move Measure command for all tracks or within the same track the specified dest
36. C 2 and above keys to which no pattern has been assigned can be played to sound the program of the MIDI track selected by Track Select Creating an RPPR pattern Realtime recording an RPPR performance SEQ HAETAAN Program T01 8 Vv iG Meter 4 4 J 120 00 Manual S000 NEW SONG TECH el ay Resolution Hi m RPPR T 2 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch 02 RPPR NoAssign 1 E E q4 5 5 7 Category gt 15 gt 4 2 2 gt 00 gt 00 Ibaia J Keyboard Keyboard j Keyboard Keyboard J Keyboard Keyboard J Keyboard J Bank Program E091 Ag00 ABO ABBA ABBO ABBO ABBA aoga Basic Kit1 KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran mm nm HH amp 3 I Prog Prog ARP ARP Tone Prefe PlayLoop PlayLoop lt 1 8 B 9 16 A E A A Ih B jJ Adjust rences 1 8 9 16 5 Since you want the tracks you play via RPPR and the track you play from the keyboard to be recorded at the same time check the Multi REC check box Note If Recording Setup is set to Loop All Tracks it will not be possible to select Multi REC Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite see page 60 6 Press the SEQUENCER REC button to enter record ready mode 7 For the tracks you will be recording MIDI Track 1 2 press Play Rec Mute to make them indicate REC Make sure that the tracks you re not recording are indicated as
37. Drum Track page OSC Play Mute Drum Track Play Mute Menu PRO i CHAEL Category J 109 00 Balk A gt 00 Keyboe d J 3 00 KROME G T EERE OSCe DRU ae Preset P8339 8 Beat Pop 1 All S Program A 17 Jazz Dry Ambience Kit 127 127 127 i 3 20k EHE Oo 98 Oo 02 5 03 0 01 0 te La Volume Play 2 Select a slider in the display and use the VALUE dial etc to adjust the volume of oscillators 1 and 2 and the drum track For oscillators that use two drum kits you can use the OSC1 and OSC2 sliders to adjust the direct sound of the close miced drum kit and the ambient sound of the drum kit captured with more space Note With single oscillator programs you won t be able to control oscillator 2 3 You can press the Play Mute button in the display to toggle the Play Mute status of oscillators 1 and 2 and the drum track 4 You can press the Solo button in the display to toggle the Solo On Off status of oscillators 1 and 2 and the drum track The function of the Solo button will switch each time you select Exclusive Solo in the menu see page 64 of the Parameter Guide Mixer amp Drum Track J Ie 27 28 Playing and editing Programs Using realtime controls to edit the sound or effects You can use the realtime controls the SELECT button and knobs 1 4 to modify the sound and control the arpeggiator 1 Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT button
38. KROME s VOLUME knob all the way to the left so that the volume is down If external equipment such as powered monitor speakers are connected lower their volume as well and then turn off their power 2 Press the power switch on the KROMF s rear panel to turn the power on The display will show the model name and software version The illustration shows the screen that will appear with the factory settings This may change without notice KROME ee a ARS amp If the auto power off function is enabled the time until auto power off turns off the power will be shown when the system starts up If this dialog box does not appear the auto power off function is disabled the power will not turn off automatically see Auto power off function on page 16 i Auto Power Of f is enabled The system will automatically shut down after being idle for 4 Hours Change Setting OK Turn on the power of the external equipment that s connected to the KROME s AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks such as powered monitor speakers Use the KROME s VOLUME knob and the volume controls of your external equipment to adjust the volume to a suitable level Note The page that appears when you turn on the power will depend on the Power On Mode setting see page 110 Turning the power off amp When you turn off the power unsaved data will be lost Be sure to save any important data such as edited
39. Kits The drumsample s pitch does not change You have left the Assign check box unchecked and want to play the drumsample at the adjacent right a semitone lower but the pitch does not change e If you have selected a drum program in Program mode and then want to edit the drum kit in Global mode go to the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Pitch page and set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter Global mode gt PG p 20 Can t edit the drum kit for Double Drums OSC2 e Access the P2 OSC Pitch OSC2 Setup page and move to Global mode by pressing the Jump to Drum Kit Edit button Effects Effects are not audible Have you selected effect program 000 No Effect e Select an effect other than 000 No Effect for IFX1 5 MEX 1 2 or TFX Are the Effect Global SW IFX 1 5 MFX1 amp 2 or TFX Global PO Basic Setup page settings checked gt PG p 195 If you are in Combination and Sequencer mode and master effects are not audible when you raise the Send1 or Send2 of the timbre track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised gt PG p 61 p 99 p 152 Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator of the program used by the timbre track been lowered gt PG p 96 p 148 Note The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the send setting of the timbre track Have you routed the output to an insert effect
40. LME Arpeggiator Tempo ARP Scan Zone MAT oe Scan Zone Top Key Bottom key C 1 Top Velocity 127 Bottom Velocity 001 ARP Scan DrumTrk DrumTrk Setup Zone Pattern Prog Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode In Combination mode the KROME provides dual arpeggiators allowing you to run two arpeggio patterns simultaneously 1 In Combination mode select a combination see Selecting Combinations on page 43 As you select various combinations you ll notice that the ARP button LED will light up for some combinations see Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations on page 91 When you play the keyboard the arpeggiator will start Even for other combinations you can turn the arpeggiator on by pressing the ARP button the LED will light up 2 Listen to how the arpeggio can be modified as described in the Using knobs 1 4 to control the arpeggiator above and Selecting an arpeggio pattern and specifying its function sections below amp The ARP button TEMPO knob TAP button and control surface ARP will apply to both arpeggiators A and B Their state is saved when the combination is written Selecting an arpeggio pattern and adjusting settings In the Combi P0 Play Arpeggiator page you can select an arpeggio pattern and specify how the arpeggiator will function e In Combi PO Play press the ARP A tab or the ARP B tab to select the Combi P0
41. Length 8 COCO Step No 01 P Sa Entering tones a Alternate Set or reset the tone 2 Pen set only Set the tone Kd Erase reset only Reset the tone P Tool Opens the tool tablet The tool tablet lets you use various commands in a region you ve specified in the overview or to copy and paste see Tool Tablet on page 214 of the Parameter Guide Creating an example pattern 1 Press the alternate button 2 Enter tones in the touch grid as shown in the illustration below U100 USER Length 08 lw g o eo a 1 O n 07 ESLA gt Step Pitch 00 Gate 050 Velocity 064 Flam 00 Cancel OK Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern 3 When you play the keyboard as shown in the illustration the arpeggiator will begin playing Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of chord you play on the keyboard If Sort is unchecked it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play 4 For steps 01 08 make settings for Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam Pitch Offset This offsets the pitch of the arpeggio note in semitones up or down You can input the same tone for each step and change the Pitch Offset value for each to create a melody using a single tone See Melody pattern Gate Specifies the length of the arpeggio note for each step With a setting of Legato
42. Multisample Banks Mono and Stereo Note that stereo Multisamples will require twice as many voices as mono Multisamples Multisamples are organized by category such as piano guitar bell etc 33 34 Playing and editing Programs 4 Press the Multisample popup button for multisample1 Reverse StartOffset Level Offset Off Level 127 Multisample I Mono gt GTR atom Ear Or gags Acoustic Piano 0ff 127 i This brings up a list of Multisamples organized by category Use the tabs on the left of the display to browse through the different categories Multisample popup button 5 Select a Multisample by touching its name in the list You can also use Find to search for a Multisample 6 Press the OK button to confirm your selection 7 Perform the same steps for multisample2 selecting a different Multisample than for multisample1 Now that you ve assigned Multisamples to multisamplel and multisample 2 let s set up the velocity ranges and crossfades Multisamples have now been assigned to multisample 1 and 2 8 Specify the velocity range and crossfade range Press the Velocity tab to access the OSC1 Velocity page Set the multisample 2 Threshold Velocity to 001 and turn Crossfade Off 9 Set the multisample 1 Threshold Velocity to 80 You can also set Threshold Velocity by dragging the bottom edge of the line graph With these
43. Play Arpeggiator A or B page Arpeggiator Run Timbre Assign COMBI a HarL jua 6 Category 126 30 Bank A gt 10 Synth 1005 Boom Pow Pad i GATE 00 VEL 00 mA mB at L T T SWING 00 STEP 00 B E Arpeggiator A Pattern U8 789 INT Dr Boom Pow Beat ys Resolution 3 Octave 1 O 2 C Sort C Key Sync O3 O04 m Latch C Keyboard Prog Prog 1 8 9 16 ARP Tone B Adjust Select the arpeggiator s that will run Use the Arpeggiator Run check boxes to specify the arpeggiator s that you want to have running The arpeggiator s that are checked here will run when the ARP button is on However the arpeggiator will only play a timbre if the table next to the check boxes assigns arpeggiator A or B to a timbre T 1 16 You change these settings in Combi P7 ARP DT ARP Setup T01 08 TO9 16 page Arpeggiator Assign see page 90 Using the arpeggiator while you play Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes Arpeggiator A Arpeggiator B For each arpeggiator A and B you can adjust settings for Pattern Select Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard see page 86 Checking the structure of a user arpeggio pattern Let s see how the combination A005 Boom Pow Pad category LeadSplits is constructed e Select combination A005 Boom Pow Pad category LeadSplits and look at the Arpeggio Play A page and Arpeggio Play B pa
44. Play or Mute 8 Press the LOCATE f lt button to set the location to 001 01 000 9 Press the START STOP gt W button and then press a key that plays an RPPR pattern Then press the key where the RPPR pattern playback is assigned If the key where the RPPR is assigned is pressed during the pre count before recording RPPR pattern playback will start the moment that recording begins after the pre count Record the RPPR pattern playback and keyboard performance amp When recording the playback of patterns triggered by RPPR the timing of the recorded events may be slightly skewed If this occurs try setting REC Resolution to a setting other than Hi 10 When you are finished performing press the START STOP p gt W button Recording will end and the sequencer will return to the location where recording began If you made a mistake during your performance or would like to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE button to re record as many times as you wish 11 If you want to record other tracks un check the Multi REC See step 5 or RPPR See step 4 check boxes as necessary 73 74 Creating songs Sequencer mode Creating and playing a Cue List A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in succession You can create the individual sections of a song such as the intro melody A melody B chorus and ending and then use a Cue List to assemble these sections into
45. Press the ARP button to turn on the arpeggiator the button will light up Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you moved here you can use the ARP button to turn it on However if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked and if Arpeggiator Assign is set to off then the arpeggiator will not function 3 Select the Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page 4 If you accessed this page from Combination mode use the Arpeggio Select A and B to select the arpeggiator that you wish to edit If this is A your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A If this is B your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B 5 Switch between arpeggiators A and B and edit their respective user arpeggio patterns If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators return to Combination mode and in Combination P0 Play Arpeggio A or the Arpeggio B page and uncheck the Arpeggiator Run check box 6 To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern use the Utility Rename Arpeggio Pattern See page 221 of the Parameter Guide 7 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern in internal memory you must write the user arpeggio pattern In this case both user arpeggio patterns will be written simultaneously If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost see page 221 of the Parameter Guide 8 If you wish to save t
46. Press the SEQ button to enter Sequencer mode 2 Access the Seq P10 Patern RPPR Pattern Edit page 3 Select the user pattern that you want to convert to a Drum Track pattern Set Pattern to User and use Pattern Select to select the desired pattern 4 Choose the menu command Convert to Drum Trk Pattern to access the dialog box Convert to Drum Track Pattern To gt 3U00 InitDrumPattern All Patterns available in Song 800 m Note Only Cancel OK 5 Use the To Drum Track Pattern Select field to specify the user Drum Track pattern number that will hold the converted data When you execute the command the data will be overwritten onto this number 6 If you select the All Patterns available in Song option all patterns in the song that contain note data will be converted starting with the number you specified in step 3 7 If you execute this command with Note Only selected only the note events will be converted 8 Press the OK button or the ENTER button to execute If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button or the EXIT button 9 As described in Using the Drum Track function in Program mode on page 97 set the Drum Track Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern No to the user Drum Track pattern you converted Then play the Drum Track pattern Song Program Combination Drum Track Preset Pattern Track RPPR
47. Qof Qof Ooft Arpeggiator Run m A m B 4 Set J Temp to specify the tempo This is the same as for a program However the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A and B 5 Make Arpeggiator Assign settings Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been assigned to it 6 Make Arpeggiator Run settings Check the arpeggiator s that you want to run The arpeggiator s checked here will run when the ARP button is turned on With the settings shown in the display for steps 2 and 3 turning the ARP button on will cause arpeggiator A to run for timbres 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B to run for timbre 3 When the ARP button is turned off timbres 1 4 will sound as a layer If all timbres Assign status are set to Off or if Arpeggiator Run A or B is unchecked the arpeggiator will not function 7 On the Arpeggiator A and Arpeggiator B pages set the parameters for arpeggiators A and B The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program see page 86 8 In the Scan Zone A B page specify the range in which arpeggiators A and B will function The parameters for A and B are the same as for a program You can use keyboard ranges or velocity ranges to use one or both of the arpeggiators or to switch between arpeggiators A and B By using the Combi P4 Zone Delay Key Zone T01 08 T09 16 page and Vel Zone T01 08 T0
48. START STOP gt E button Recording will end and the location will return to the point where you begin recording If you press the PAUSE ff button instead of the START STOP gt Hf button recording will pause When you press the PAUSE ff button once again recording will resume where you left off before pausing When you are finished press the START STOP gt W button to stop recording The following recording setup parameters are also available Overdub Select this method if you wish to record additional performance data by overdubbing it without erasing the previously recorded data Manual punch in Select this method when you wish to use the SEQUENCER REC button or a foot switch to re record selected portions of a previously recorded track Auto punch in Select this method when you wish to automatically re record selected portions of a previously recorded track Then recording will occur only over the specified area Auto Punch In Start Measure Auto Punch In End Measure rewriting it with the newly recorded data Loop All Tracks Select this method when you wish to repeatedly record over a specified area of a track while continuing to add data This is suitable for creating drum patterns etc For details please see An example of realtime recording on page 61 Multi multitrack recording Use MIDI multi track recording if you want to simultaneously record multiple tracks
49. See page 85 5 DRUM TRACK DRUM TRACK button This button turns the Drum Track function on or off This button also indicates the operating state of the drum track Unlit off Blinking waiting for trigger Lit on See page 97 6 Effect buttons MASTER FX button TOTAL FX button These buttons turn the master effect and total effect on off When the button is on LED lit the effect settings of the program combination or song will be enabled When the button is off LED unlit the corresponding effect will be off The on off status of these buttons is remembered even when you switch programs combinations or songs See page 110 Introduction to the KROME 7 Display Display The TouchView display features simple touch control and selection of numerous features and parameters See page 4 8 Mode COMBI PROG SEQ GLOBAL MEDIA buttons KROME has five different modes each one is optimized for a specific set of functions Press one of these buttons to enter the corresponding mode For more details please see Selecting modes on page 9 9 PROG COMBI BANK A B C D E F buttons These buttons select program banks A F and combination banks A D see page 21 and page 44 You can also use these buttons to select the bank of timbre programs in a combination or the bank of track programs in a song see page 46 and page 57 If you want to select a GM bank use the numeric keys see pag
50. Toolbox Select or move a note Change the length of notes Enter notes Delete notes Move the note view area that is displayed ll View area height select Switch the note event display LI Scroll view control Be Y 1077 L 001 450 Zoom Ends piano roll editing Creating an RPPR pattern RPPR stands for Realtime Pattern Play Recording and is a function that lets you assign pattern data to each key and then play back that pattern simply by pressing the key where it is assigned You can realtime record this performance Creating RPPR data 1 Create a new song and choose a drum program for track 1 2 Access the P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page In this page the RPPR function is automatically turned on 3 Select the key where the pattern will be assigned 4 Select C 2 You can also change this setting by holding down the KEY edit cell and playing a note on the keyboard Note C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback and cannot be assigned patterns 5 Check Assign for C 2 6 Set Pattern Bank to Preset and set Pattern Select to P001 7 Set Track to Track01 The selected pattern will be played according to the settings program etc of the track you select here SEQ Cae ladies RPPR Setup x IO S000 NEW SONG J 120 00 Track 1 MIDI TRACK 1 E091 Basic Kit1 S RPPR Se
51. _Done T Plays back the song The Piano Roll Edit Play dialog box will appear when you press this button gt Piano Roll Edit Play Piano Roll Editing Piano Roll editing lets you enter edit or delete event data such as notes velocities and control changes 1 In the Seq P6 Track Edit Track View page specify the track and measure that you want to edit 2 Select the Q tool in the Track View page or select Piano Roll from the menu commands to access the Piano Roll window See illustration below 3 Make sure that the events you want to edit are displayed in the note view area at the upper part of the window or in the control view area at the lower part of the window e Press the note view area selector and use the value controllers e Select the tool and drag e Enter Meas or in the event list e Use the view control zoom buttons to zoom in out e Switch the view area height selector 4 Use the tool box to select a tool and edit the data Note If you want to undo an edit press the Undo button 5 To play back the events press the Play button A dialog box will open and the song will start playing This allows you to check the results of your editing 6 You can change settings such as the note resolution Press the Setup button and adjust the settings in the Piano Roll Setup dialog box 7 When you re finished editing press the Done button The selected note event
52. a song by specifying the desired order and the number of repetitions for each section You can then edit the cue list to efficiently try out different structures for your song You can also use this as a jukebox function that will play back completed songs in the order you specify Cue List Step Song Repeat for 000 no no 02 S001 A 02 2 A Solo Chorus Chorus Chorus Ending Ending 04 S003 Chorus 0 05 S001 A 02 06 S002 B 01 07 S003 Chorus 02 08 S001 A Solo 01 09 S003 Chorus 03 10 S004 Ending 02 Creating a cue list Each unit in a cue list is called a step and each step contains a song number and the number of repeats For example suppose you ve created the songs S000 INTRO S001 VERSE and S002 CHORUS Let s use a cue list to connect these songs together 1 Access the Seq P11 Cue List page With the default settings song S000 will be selected for Step 01 and End will be selected for Step 02 Meter 4 4 J 120 88 Manual 2C00 NEW CUELIST 00 Track 2 MIDI TRACK 82 AOOO KROME Grand Piano STEP 01 01 SONG 000 NEW SONG Length 664 Step Measure Song Repeat Load FX gt 81 M0001 S000 NEW SONG x 81 O gt 02 M0065 End 83 04 85 A Insert Cut Copy K Step 01 2 Add a song to the Step area Select the Song for Step 02 and press
53. a supplementary note or a tip Example screen displays The parameter values shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory purposes and may not necessary match the values that appear in the Display of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers What is REMs 7EMS f ems Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Modeling System is Korg s proprietary technology for digitally recreating the numerous factors that produce and influence a sound ranging from the sound production mechanisms of acoustic instruments and electric electronic musical instruments to the resonances of an instrument body or speaker cabinet the sound field in which the instrument is played the propagation route of the sound the electrical and acoustic response of mics and speakers and the changes produced by vacuum tubes and transistors All product names and company names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Table of Contents About this manual cccccccccccccccs ii Introduction to the KROME 1 Front and rear panels cccccccecccscvecs 1 FIOM Dal cessa pterea e eon eee esd 1 Rea Daneler tone soe see needa ees 3 Objects in the display cece eee eee 4 Basic Information cceccccccececceces
54. can produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases based on the pitch or timing of the notes you play on the keyboard These functions let you use the arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases and guitar or keyboard backing riffs It is also effective to use the arpeggiator as part of the sound design process when creating subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects The KROME s Dual Arpeggiator feature lets you use two simultaneous arpeggio patterns in Combination mode and Sequencer mode You can take advantage of this in many ways including a separate arpeggio pattern for a drum program and another applied to a bass program or using a keyboard split or velocity to switch between two arpeggio patterns The KROME provides five preset arpeggio patterns the standard UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM You can also create and store 1 028 of your own user patterns The factory settings contain a wide variety of arpeggio patterns stored in these user locations see page 211 of the Parameter Guide Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 1 Press the PROG button to enter Program mode and select a program For details please see Selecting Programs on page 21 2 Press ARP button the LED will light to turn on the arpeggiator Arpeggios will begin sounding when you play the keyboard 3 As described in the following sections Using knobs 1 4 to control the arpeggiator a
55. can use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start recording in Sequencer mode You can use preset drum patterns that cover a wide range of musical styles as well as user patterns that you yourself created P001 P605 Preset Drum Track patterns U000 U999 User Drum Track patterns You can write your own patterns into U000 U999 User patterns you ve created in Sequencer mode can be converted into user Drum Track patterns The Drum Track pattern will start immediately when you press the DRUM TRACK button or when you play the keyboard after pressing the ON OFF button If you re starting the pattern by playing the keyboard you have the option of starting it by using a specific range of notes or velocities In Program mode the drum track has a dedicated mixer channel including EQ and effect routing allowing you to control the drum track independently from the sound of the program itself In Combination and Sequencer modes the drum track is handled as a conventional timbre or track allowing you to select programs edit EQ settings and specify the effect routing in the same way as for conventional timbres or tracks Using the Drum Track function in Program mode Turning the Drum Track function on off 1 In Program mode select a program see Selecting Programs on page 21 PROG URE Category J 1809 00 gt 00 Keyboard j Bank A 1000 KROME Grand Piano USER CONTROLS 1 F A Attack 2 Kn
56. cause only the kick Tone00 and snare Tone01 to play In this way the number of keys that you play will be played by the same number of tones Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern 11 Set the parameters for each step Use Velocity etc to add accents to the rhythm pattern amp The Gate and Velocity settings you select here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters Program P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded according to the settings of the Program P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page Check the settings of the program amp When specifying Gate and Velocity press the control surface ARP button and set knob 1 GATE and knob 2 VELOCITY to the center position 12 o clock Dual arpeggiator editing Here we will use a combination as an example in our explanation The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio pattern in Sequencer mode If you have entered this mode from the Combination mode the arpeggio pattern selected by the combination will be affected by your editing 1 In Combination mode select a combination that uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit For this example select a combination where both arpeggiators A and B are assigned 2
57. display the edit pad by pressing twice in succession on the edit cell or by holding it down for a time and then releasing it see page 6 f Sliders and knobs To edit the value of an object shaped like a slider or knob press it to move the edit cell For details on how to edit the value please see e Edit cell above The parameter will be active if it is checked and inactive if it is unchecked ay gt A g Check boxes The presence or absence of a check mark in these boxes will enable disable parameters or functions Putting a check mark in the box will enable the item and clearing the check mark will disable it h Toggle buttons This type of button will change its function or switch on off each time it is pressed Play Rec Mute button Sequencer mode Solo On Off button Sequencer mode SS On Off button for Effect Frontandrear panels Objects in the display i Popup button 1 When this button is pressed a popup menu will appear showing the parameter values that are available for selection To enter the parameter value press the desired value in the popup menu Popup menu Pin Pag Timbre This switches the popup menu Pin a a display between locked and eT unlocked AET When locked the pin will be shown a5 13 closed and the popup menu will 66 14 remain displayed even after you 67 15 press a parameter value When ie unlocked the pin will be shown
58. down the ENTER button and press a note on the keyboard Note You can also use a MIDI note on message instead of the keyboard Note While a dialog box is displayed the ENTER button will perform the same function as the OK button This means that you can t use this method to enter a note number or velocity value in a dialog box that contains an OK button Specifying the location in a song In Sequencer mode sets the current location as the Location equivalent to the Set Location menu command e Hold down the ENTER button and press the LOCATE F button ENTER button e While a dialog box is displayed this button performs the same function as the OK button EXIT button This button makes it easy to return to the main page of the current mode 1 Press it once to go to the previously selected tab on the main P0 page 2 Press the EXIT button You will move to the previously selected parameter of the PO top page Prog Main Combi Seq Program T01 08 3 Press the EXIT button You will move to the following parameter of the PO top page Prog Program Select Combi Combination Select Seq Song Select Basic Information In any page of Program or Combination mode pressing EXIT a maximum of two times will immediately allow you to use the numeric keys or INC DEC buttons to select programs or combinations In Sequencer mode pressing EXIT a maximum of three times will allow you to select a song EXIT button in dia
59. drum programs You can t write save data to these banks Selecting by Bank Program Select menu You can select Programs from a menu organized by Program bank 1 Press the Program Select popup button The Bank Program Select menu appears Bank Program Select menu Bank Program Select ponk A000 KROME Grand Piano A008 Thin Stereo Brass pank AQQ1 E Piano Mark R amp B Kn3 A009 Flute Vibrato Rank A 2 E P Mark V Distotion A910 Analog Strings Stereo pank A Q3 E Piano Dyno Chorus AQ11 MG Funk Bass pank AQO4 Reed EP 200A Wah Knob3 A012 Rapper s D light Bank A O5 Drawbars SW1 2 AQ13 Deep Soul Lead fork ABOG Clav Register AD AQ14 A Guitar Dynamic Pick oh A007 Stereo Strings Legato ia A015 E Guitar Twin Cancel In this illustration Bank A is selected The menu displays the Programs contained in that bank 2 Press the tabs on the left side of the display to select banks 3 Press one of the program names in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted and the program will change Alternatively you can use the INC DEC buttons to switch programs Play the keyboard or press the chord trigger buttons to hear the program you selected 4 If you selected Bank GM the Variation button is shown By repeatedly pressing this Variation button you can successively step through the banks allowing you to recall a GM2 sound set see To select a G
60. each track e Use up to five insert effects two master effects and one total effect e Record patterns and assign them to individual keys using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording e Create a Cue List that will play back multiple songs in the order that you specify e Create user Drum Track patterns Global mode Global mode lets you adjust overall settings for the entire KROME and edit drum kits arpeggio patterns In Global mode you can e Adjust settings that affect the entire KROME such as master tune and global MIDI channel e Create user scales e Create drum kits using drumsamples e Create user arpeggio patterns e Rename program and combination categories e Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable buttons e Transmit MIDI System Exclusive data dumps Media mode You can save or load data using an SD card In Media mode you can e Save and load Programs Combinations Songs and Global setup data e Format SD card copy and rename files etc e Perform file operations such as copying data to or from media e Export and import sequences to and from SMF Standard MIDI Files e Use the Data Filer function to save or load MIDI System Exclusive data Introduction to the KROME Relational diagram of the KROME s modes PROGRAM OSC 1 Insert Master Total Effect Multisample 1 Drum Kit Multisample 5 Multisample 2 Multisample 6 Multisample 3 Multisa
61. effects sidechains Sidechains let you control an effect with one audio signal the sidechain while the effect processes a completely different audio signal This is convenient for use with vocoders compressors and limiters gates etc For details please see FX Control Buses on page 238 of the Parameter Guide 79 80 Using Effects 10 Access the P8 Routing IFX Insert FX Setup page and edit the parameters of the insert effect you selected Press the IFX 1 5 tabs and edit the parameters Effect Parameters Effect On Off P Effect Preset PROG P8 Routing IFX 1 Wide 1 Trim 100 Band1 dB 00 0 ce en ae n OOME Band2 dB 00 0 si EEA Diesssssssseleecssssstessseneet 220HZ Band3 dB FOGG Boosie ct tc Jeessttteecleesssecteeeeeet 5QGHZ Band4 dB 00 0 c cadereusencan licnstvetconmtanauc bl Khe Band5 dB O08 oes liscanciinentcat 12 Khe Band6 dB PO Sanon ERNS PENE AE 6 3kHz Band7 dB 00 0 insanire Pena 16kHz Wet Dry Wet Src off Amt 0 oale one oe ee Wet Dry Effect 1 On Off Turns the insert effect on off This is linked with the on off setting on the Insert FX Setup page P Effect Preset Selects an effect preset The KROME s internal memory contains effect presets which are parameter settings for each effect from 001 Stereo Compressor through 193 Early Reflections Effect parameters you edit are saved as part
62. external tone generator and internal tone generator will be played and controlled e Use MIDI Channel to specify the MIDI channel for each track Normally you will set the MIDI Channel to a different channel 1 16 for each track Tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously when you record or play back either of the tracks 5 Adjust the effect settings Adjust settings for each effect in P8 Routing IFX and P9 MFX TFX LFO For details please see Using effects in Combinations and Songs on page 81 6 Set the tempo and time signature e To set the tempo you can turn the TEMPO knob or press the TAP button at the desired interval Alternatively you can select J Tempo in the PO Play REC Program T01 08 page or similar page and use the VALUE controllers to set the tempo Set Tempo Mode to Manual e Next you will set the time signature In this example we ll explain how to set the time signature using the Meter field Normally you specify the time signature before recording the first track and then begin recording Press the SEQUENCER REC button and set Meter to b Press to highlight it and use the VALUE controllers to set the time signature Press the START STOP gt W button to begin recording When the pre count has ended and Locate reaches 001 01 000 press the START STOP gt W button to stop recording The time signature you specified h
63. function to start simultaneously with the start of recording press the DRUM TRACK button during the pre count before recording if Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately or play the keyboard if Trigger Mode is Wait KBD Trigger The Drum Tracks will not be triggered immediately but will be triggered in synchronization with the sequencer the moment recording starts Slave operation Connect the KROME s MIDI IN to your external MIDI device s MIDI OUT or connect the KROME s USB B connector to your computer s USB port Set MIDI Clock see page 111 to External MIDI or External USB Note If the KROME is set to MIDI Clock Auto it will also synchronize to the external MIDI device in the same way if MIDI timing clock messages are being received from the external device Synchronization to MIDI clock The arpeggiator function will synchronize to a tempo based on the external MIDI clock timing Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands In Sequencer mode Song Start Continue and Stop messages that the KROME receives will control song playback and recording just as when you use the front panel START STOP gt W button The KARMA function also will be controlled in the same way as when you use the front panel START STOP gt W button See Synchronization with song stop Drum Track function settings Creating a Drum Track pattern Master operation If you want an external MIDI device or computer to sync
64. high quality drum programs while you perform using a program Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a useful way to come up with new phrases For more about the Drum Track function please see page 97 Effects For details please see Using Effects on page 77 Automatically importing a Program into Sequence mode You can use the Auto Song Setup feature which automatically copies the settings of the program or combination and puts the KROME in record standby mode when you simply press the REC button Then you can press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt HM button to begin recording For details please see Auto Song Setup function on page 59 Playing and editing Combinations About the KROME s combinations Combinations let you split and layer up to 16 Programs at once A Combination is made up of 16 Timbres Note that you don t have to use all 16 Timbres Each Timbre is assigned a Program along with parameters for key range and velocity zones mixer settings MIDI channel and controller filtering and so on Playing combinations Selecting Combinations There are several different ways to select Combinations Each one is convenient in a different way e Using Combination Select and the VALUE controllers e Using the Bank Combination Select menu e Using the Category Program Select menu e Find e Using a foot switch page 19 e Sending MIDI program change mess
65. is the more straightforward method To set this up 1 Connect a foot switch to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH input Use an optional PS 1 pedal switch 2 Access the Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page GLOBAL ARAH LLE S Foot Switch amp Pedal Damper iene VY G Foot Switch Assign Religie Foot Pedal Assign off KORG Standard KORG Standard Damper Polarity Foot Switch Polarity GA Proceed as follows Press the GLOBAL button to enter Global mode Press the PAGE button to access the GLOBAL Page Select Press P2 Controllers then press the Foot Control tab in the display 3 Set Foot Switch Assign to either Program Up or Program Down If you choose Program Up the next program number up will be selected each time you press the foot switch If you choose Program Down the next program number down will be selected each time you press the foot switch 4 Set the Foot Switch Polarity to match the polarity of the pedal you ve connected If you ve connected the optional PS 1 or PS 3 pedal choose KORG Standard Now the foot switch will step through the Programs one by one 5 If you want to preserve this setting even when the power is turned off be sure to Write the data See page 116 Press the PROG button to enter Prog PO Play and press the foot switch to change the Program Note This setting applies to sele
66. its name in the list 6 Press the OK button to confirm your selection Cancel OK 7 Switch the slot to 2 and make settings for Drumsample 2 in the same way Now that you ve assigned Drumsamples to Drumsample1 and Drumsample2 let s set up the velocity ranges and crossfades 8 Access the P5 Drum Kit Velocity Split page 9 Set Drumsample2 s Threshold Velocity to 1 and its Crossfade to Off 10 Set Drumsample1 s Threshold Velocity to 80 You can edit the Threshold Velocity setting by touching and dragging the graphic on the right see EG Velocity Split on page 6 Now Drumsample2 will sound when you play softly at velocities of 79 or less and Drumsamplel1 will sound when you play harder with velocities of 80 or more The meter at the left side of the Velocity Split graphic indicates the note on velocity value This lets you verify the drumsample that will be sounded by a given velocity 11 Next set Drumsample1 s Crossfade to 20 and its Curve to Linear Notice that the graphic now shows the two ranges tapering into one another Between 80 and 100 Drumsample2 will fade out and Drumsamplel will fade in creating a gradual velocity transition instead of a hard split GLOBAL GERIATR Si 22 INT Basic Kit 1 GE CE Threshold Velocity Ean 080 CPA Linear o 001 Off Q Linear off 001 Off Q Linear y 4 off aa Off Linear 64 o
67. loaded e Program Bank A B C D E e Combination Bank A B C e Drum Kit 0O0 INT 31 INT e User Arpeggio Pattern U0000 INT U899 INT e Global Setting If you execute All Preload PCG and Demo Songs the demo songs will be loaded as well as the above data e Demo Song 8000 003 Only when executing All Preload PCG and Demo Song Note As with the other user songs the Demo Song data will not remain in Sequencer mode when you turn off the power You ll need to load it again if necessary Initialization If your KROME should become unstable you can initialize it e Turn off the power and then while holding down the EXIT button and PAGE button turn the power on The KROME will be initialized While the data is being loaded the display will indicate Now writ ing into internal memory The resulting state will be the same as when Load Preload Demo Data All is executed see page 125 125 126 Appendices Troubleshooting If you experience problems please see the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power supply Power does not turn on Is the AC adapter connected to an outlet gt p 15 Power turns off Could the Auto Power Off function be enabled gt p 16 Display The power is turned on but nothing is shown on the display The KROME functions normal ly when you play the keyboard or perform other procedures Access the Global mode menu Display Setup Global
68. mode Basic Information Basic operations Selecting and executing menu commands Toei Vv a Menu command button Write Combination Exclusive Solo Auto Song Setup Copy from Program Copy Tone Adjust Reset Tone Adjust __Menu button The utility functions provide commands that are specific to each page such as Write save or Copy The available utility functions will depend on the selected page For example the utility functions in Program mode let you write save the settings or let you perform convenient editing operations such as copying settings between oscillators or effects or a Sync function that lets you edit two EGs together 1 On the upper right side of the display press the v button The menu command will appear 2 Select a menu command by touching it with your finger A dialog box for the selected menu command will appear Check type commands will not display a dialog box their status will be switched and the list will close By holding down the ENTER button and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can access the dialog box for the first ten utility functions without going through the menu e If you want to close the list without selecting a command press the display somewhere other than the list or press the EXIT button 3 For a parameter in a dialog box select it by pressing it with your finger and use the VALUE controllers e g VALUE dial or INC DEC buttons to enter its val
69. note on velocity of the keyboard MIDI IN and arpeggiator etc If multiple note on messages are received simultaneously the highest velocity value is shown 1 F A Attack 2 St Exciter Enhner Picture 2 Knob Mod 2 064 OSC Oct E SS 3 Knob Mod 3 064 4 Knob Mod 4 3 No Effect IFX 1 5 4 No Effect 5 No Effect MFX 1 2 RETURN Send level On Off E Tex on off swi sw2 Velocity Meter EQ Proc E Vv O Category J 109 00 IL Realtime Controls Bank A gt 00 Keyboard Tone Controls 000 KROME Grand Piano Fm soos Arp Controls OSC USER CONTROLS IFX1 St Graphic 7EQ Effect Infomation Using Controllers In addition to using the keyboard the KROME lets you control the sound by using the joystick SW1 and SW2 buttons knobs 1 4 damper pedal and foot switch or foot pedal These controls let you modify the tone pitch volume effects etc in realtime as you play SW 1 SW 2 cS Co 1511 Isw2 Lock function ak MEN x E e Joystick Joystick The joystick moves in four directions left right up away from yourself and down towards yourself Each of the four directions can be used to control a different function such as modulating Program or effects parameters These assignments can be different for every Program but generally they do the following Standard Joystick functions Controller Move the jo
70. number of times When you execute the Repeat Measure command the measures will be inserted following the measure specified by To End of Measure and musical data following the inserted data will be moved backward Copy Measure This command copies the measures of musical data specified as the From source to the beginning of the measure specified as the To location When you execute the Copy Measure command the existing track data at the copy destination will be rewritten Move Measure This command moves the specified measures of performance data to another measure When you execute the Move Measure command the performance data following the move source measures will move forward by the corresponding number of measures and the performance data following the move destination will move backward i e later in the song by the same number of measures Create Control Data This command creates control change aftertouch pitch bend or tempo data in the specified region of a MIDI track or the master track Erase Control Data This command erases data such as control changes aftertouch pitch bend or tempo in the specified range Quantize This command corrects the timing of MIDI data of the type you specify note data control change aftertouch pitch bend program change etc in the track You can also adjust for swing Shift Erase Note This command shifts moves or erases the specified note numbers in a specifie
71. of electrical power is used even when the power is off STANDBY If you won t be using the KROME for an extended period turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Auto power off function The KROME supports an auto power off function that automatically turns off the power when the keyboard or front panel buttons have not been used for a certain length of time Usage of the VOLUME knob is not included Note With the factory settings the time until automatic power off will be approximately four hours amp When the power turns off the settings you had been editing will be lost Make sure that you save important settings before this occurs Changing the auto power off setting If you want to change the setting so that the power does not turn off automatically proceed as follows to disable the auto power off function Making the change in the dialog box immediately after start up If the auto power off function is enabled so that the power will turn off automatically the dialog box will appear immediately after start up indicating the time until automatic power off will occur Auto Power Of f is enabled The system will automatically shut down after being idle for 4 hours Change Setting OK 1 While this message is displayed press the Change Setting button in the dialog box The following dialog box will appear Auto Power Off Disabled Done 2
72. one recording type loop recording when realtime recording to a pattern You can edit the pattern to correct mistakes in the recorded data or use event editing to insert new data You can use the Get From Track menu command to obtain a desired region of performance data from a track and use it as pattern data Conversely you can use the Put to Track or Copy to Track menu commands to place or copy a pattern s performance data into a track How Sequencer patterns are related to Drum Track patterns The patterns of the Drum Track function you use with a Program or Combination are related to Sequencer mode patterns as follows Preset patterns are a common library that can also be used by the Drum Track function User patterns cannot be directly used by the Drum Track function but they can be converted to user Drum Track patterns and used with a Program or Combination If you convert a user pattern it will be stored in internal memory and this data will not disappear even when you turn off the power Cue List The cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in succession The KROME lets you create twenty cue lists Each cue list lets you connect up to 99 songs and specify the number of times that each song will repeat The menu command Convert to Song lets you convert the songs in a cue list into a single song For example you can use a cue list to create the backing convert the cue list to a song and then add solo p
73. press the Cancel button e In order to allocate memory area for Undo Compare function delete unneeded data such as songs tracks or patterns We recommend that you data to media before you execute the edit procedure 133 134 Appendices e Specifications Operating temperature 0 40 C Bidite Semi Weighted Keyboard velocity sensitive no aftertouch Normally C2 C7 adjustable in the range C1 C6 C3 C8 no Semi Weighted Keyboard velocity sensitive no aftertouch Keyboard Normally C1 C7 adjustable in the range C0 C6 C2 C8 NH Natural weighted hammer action Keyboard no aftertouch 88 note The NH Keyboard delivers a playing feel similar to that of an acoustic piano with low notes being heavier and high notes being lighter EDS X Enhanced Definition Synthesis eXpanded 120 voices max single mode 60 voices max double mode The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading 3 8 Gbytes when calculated as 48kHz 16 bit linear data Preset PCM 583 multisamples including twelve stereo 2 080 drumsamples including 474 stereo OSC1 Single OSC1 2 Double Stereo multisamples are supported Oscillator E 8 velocity zones per oscillator with switching crossfades and layers Filters Four types of filter routing single serial parallel 24 dB Two multi mode filters per voice low pass high pass band pass band
74. settings Multisample2 will sound for notes played with a velocity of 79 or less and Multisample1 will sound for notes played with a velocity of 80 or greater The Velocity Split meter shows the oscillator s eight multisamples and the velocity zones of each oscillator The meter on the left shows the note on velocity This lets you see which multisample and oscillator will sound for that specific velocity 10 Set the multisample 1 Crossfade to 20 and its Curve to Linear The state of this split is shown visually in the screen The two multisamples will fade across the range from 80 to 100 with multisample 2 fading out while multisample 1 fades in This produces a smooth change without any sudden switch 11 As necessary use the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Setup page to adjust the Level of the two multisamples PROG E EZEN v IG S Velocity Zone Bottom 001 Top 127 Threshold Velocity Crossfade Curve i TE 034 Linear c E 001 Off Linear 3 orr 001 Off Linear l Ee 001 Off Linear e or TA Off Linear 6 orr 001 Off Linear z 001 Off Linear Slap J vecito puen J 85S vets vite J ae Assigning a drum kit What is a drum kit Drum kits are created or edited in Global mode For each note of the keyboard you can assign up to eight drum instrument samples and use layering crossfading or velocity switching to switch between t
75. specifies the depth of vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when modulated by the selected AMS Alternate Modulation Source For example if the panel switch assignment for SW1 is set to SW1 Mod CC 80 Prog 1 7a and you set LFO1 AMS to SW1 CC 80 and specify an appropriate value for Intensity vibrato will be applied when you turn SW1 on or when MIDI control change 80 is received Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack Detailed Editing with Programs Controlling Pitch Portamento Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter controls how long it will take the pitch to change As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no portamento You can turn Portamento on and off via SW1 or SW2 by assigning them to Porta SW CC 65 37 38 Playing and editing Programs Using Filters The filters allow you to diminish or emphasize specified frequency areas of the sound The tone of the sound will depend significantly on the filter settings The basic filter settings
76. step recording will begin from measure 1 SEQ eee aot h Track Edit Vv iG rn t Ane Meter 4 4 Ut et Ge J 120 080 Manual 215000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 1 Resolution Hi J RPPR T 1 A00O ERME Sand Piano Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign 17 To End of Measure 001 Ea Rey WU Ea Rey n GG Teun NII Sn u m i to TA From Measure 001 4 Press the menu button and press menu command Step Recording A dialog box will appear Step Recording Track 1 Measure 001 Beat Tick 01 000 Meter 4 4 Step Time 1 O Note Duration 85 Note Velocity 64 Memory 999 Free Meal BAR Meter 4 4 Rest Done 5 In Step Time use Select to specify the basic timing value Input the first C3 note as J dotted eighth note Use the popup button to the left to select J You can choose a note value ranging from a whole note o to a 32nd note Input a dotted note by selecting buttons at right U 1I with the popup You can specify 3 to input a triplet If you want to use the unmodified length of the note that s selected at the U 1 left choose Note Duration indicates the length that the note itself will sound Smaller values will produce a staccato note and larger values will produce a legato note For this example leave this setting unchanged Note Velocity is the velocity playing st
77. the new settings of those Tone Adjust parameters Combination mode e The settings of both relative type and absolute type Tone Adjust parameters are written and preserved as the Tone Adjust settings for each timbre For details please see pages 7 75 of the Parameter Guide Writing Global settings User Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode memory area Then when you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data in internal memory you must Write it When you write this data the data in the memory area is written into internal memory If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area R r lt Edit When you Write the Winika When the power is various Global mode turned on the settings settings willbesavedin Write Power On are called into the internal memory memory area Internal Memory Global Setting Drum Kits Arpeggio Patterns PO P4 P5 P6 Writing saving procedure The following three types of Global mode data can be saved by writing it into the KROME s memory e Global settings the settings in Global P0 P4 e Drum kits the settings in Global P5 e Arpeggio patterns the settings i
78. the Drum Pattern Input setting of each song Normally you ll set this to Tch and use the KROME s keyboard to control the triggering Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by the Drum Pattern Output setting of each song Set this to match the MIDI channel of the MIDI track where you ve assigned the drum program If the track s Status is BTH EXT or EX2 note data etc of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted 101 102 Drum Track function Synchronizing the Drum Track function The Trigger Sync parameter The trigger timing of a drum track will depend on the setting of its Trigger Sync parameter On checked The trigger timing will be quantized to the nearest beat relative to the base tempo Off unchecked If Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately triggering will occur at the moment you press the DRUM TRACK button If this is set to Wait KBD Trigger triggering will occur at the moment you play the keyboard Synchronizing the drum track with the KAR MA function Sequencer mode songs pat terns and RPPR performance If you want the Drum Track pattern to play or be recorded in synchronization with the arpeggiator that s currently running a currently playing song pattern or RPPR performance turn Trigger Sync on Trigger Sync Off If the Trigger Mode setting is Start Immediately the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the moment you press the DRUM TRACK button If
79. the note will continue sounding either until the next note of the same tone or until the end of the pattern With a setting of Off the note will not sound Velocity This specifies the strength of the note With a setting of Key the note will sound at the strength of how it was actually played amp The Gate and Velocity settings you select here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters Program P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound according to the settings in Program P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page Be sure to verify the settings of the program amp When editing Gate Velocity and Swing use the SELECT button to select ARP and set knob 1 GATE and knob 2 VELOCITY to the center position 12 o clock PROG GAC Arpeggiator Tempo J 1809 06 Arpeggiator Setup Pattern U1 0a USER E Resolution 3 Gate Octave 1 Velocity Step m Sort m Key Sync Swing 800 _ Latch _ Keyboard ley ae Ee e 5 To change the user arpeggio pattern name use the Rename Arpeggio Pattern menu command See page 221 of the Parameter Guide 6 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern to internal memory be sure to Write the user arpeggio pattern See page 221 of the
80. this is set to Wait KBD Trigger the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the moment you play the keyboard It will not synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running or to the song pattern or RPPR that s currently active Trigger Sync On Triggering will synchronize to the song that s currently playing pattern or RPPR performance in units of a measure Triggering will synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running in Sequencer mode if the song or pattern is stopped in units of a beat Note If you want to synchronize arpeggiator to the Drum Track function that s currently running set the Sync parameter Prog Combi Seq P7 ARP DT Drum Trk Pattern Note If you want to synchronize the RPPR pattern performance to the Drum Track function that s currently running set the Sync parameter Seq P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page to Beat or Measure Sync settings Key1on Key2on m AIII Patterns 1 and 2 are set to Mode Manual and have identical Sync settings K 1 off Sync Off Pattern 1 AUI dlliliiiildi Pattern 2 o Sync Beat Pattern 1 Tiiiilis didi JIIIJIJJJJI pem EEP T T E moo Pattern 2 Sync Measure Pattern 1 Synchronization with song stop Synchronization with a song in Sequencer mode e When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt E button the Drum Track function will stop as well as the sequencer e Ifyou want the Drum Track
81. to overwrite the existing data If you want to overwrite the existing data press the OK button amp If the save destination directory is something other than a DOS directory e g if you re in a directory shown by opening a PCG or SNG file a message such as File path not found will appear and you won t be able to save the data If this occurs move to Media mode select the appropriate save destination i e a DOS directory and then execute Save All or Save SEQ Saving a template song If you want the programs track parameters effect settings and arpeggiator settings etc used by a song to be saved as a Template song use the Save Template Song menu command to save these settings 75 76 Creating songs Sequencer mode An overview of the KROME s effects You can choose from 193 different types of high quality digital effects The KROME provides five insert effects two master effects and one total effect together with a mixer section that controls the routing of these effects All of these are stereo in out Specific parameters of these effects can also be controlled in real time from the KROME s controllers or via MIDI messages using Dynamic Modulation Dmod by MIDI Tempo Sync or by using a common LFO to apply synchronized changes to multiple modulation effects Effect I O Insert Effects Insert Effects IFX 1 5 are stereo in stereo out If you select Dry unprocessed
82. to select the note that you wish to edit To select a key you can use any of the standard VALUE controllers the dial numeric keypad etc As a shortcut you can also hold down the Key and play a note on the keyboard This Key selection applies to all five Drum Kit editing pages 5 Use the Assign check box to specify whether the key will have its own settings or use the same settings as the next higher note If Assign is checked the key will have its own settings This is the default If Assign is not checked the key won t have its own settings Instead it will use the same settings as the next higher note except that the drumsamples will be played at a lower pitch The amount of pitch change depends on the Pitch Slope parameter on the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Pitch or OSC2 Pitch page Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch such as with tom or cymbal sounds Velocity crossfade settings For this key let s create a simple velocity crossfade between two stereo drumsamples 1 On the left side of the page make sure that Drumsamplel1 and 2 are turned On Just press the On Off buttons to toggle them if necessary GLOBAL e eat ane 2 INT Basic Kit 1 SO CLAALLILLAILAILLAACLALLLILAILLAJI Reverse StartOffset Level EE Mone Sample Setup YY G m Assign Velocity Split Offset Off Level 52 7 w 0 2192 SD Big Rock on pioz SD Big Rock 1st 18 o
83. to switch the realtime control function between TONE USER or ARP Each time you press the button you ll cycle through A B and C modes and the corresponding LED will light up Note If CC 70 79 are assigned to REALTIME CONTROLS A mode and B mode the sound that you edit using knobs 1 4 will be saved when you write the program Arpeggiator settings you adjust in C mode will also be saved 2 Modify the sound by turning the knob that you want to control See below for details TONE controls In TONE section you can turn knobs 1 4 to control or edit the following items Note When a knob is in the center position 12 o clock the parameter will have the value specified by the program Knob 1 CUTOFF This adjusts the filter s cutoff frequency Adjusting the cutoff frequency will modify the brightness of the sound Level I l l l l l Frequency Low Cut off High frequency a Knob 2 RESONANCE This adjusts the filter s resonance level Adjusting the filter resonance level will boost the sound in the region of the frequency giving a distinctive character to the sound Knob 3 EG INT This adjusts the filter EG intensity the depth of how the EG affects the filter Using the knob will change the amount of how the filter is affected by the EG Normally turning the knob toward the left will make the filter EG shallower and turning the knob toward the right will make it deeper Since the filter EG op
84. where multisamples or drumsamples are smoothly crossfaded over a specified range outside the threshold e Velocity layers where two multisamples or drumsamples are layered when you play a specified range outside the threshold Note If Oscillator Mode is set to Drums or Double Drums the velocity settings pre specified for the drum kit will be used and therefore will not be shown in the screen The velocity zone settings of a drum kit can be edited in Global P5 Drum Kit see page 105 You can jump automatically to Global P5 by pressing the Jump to DrumKit Edit button shown on the screen Selecting Multisamples Let s create a simple velocity crossfade between two Multisamples using just OSC1 1 Access the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Setup page 2 Set the Multisample On Off for multisample1 and multisample2 to On Set the Multisample On Off for multisample3 and multisample4 to Off PROG Rvaehyieri dade m OSC1 Octave 8 Transpose Tune 8000 Freq Offset 00 OSC1 Setup AY Multisample Reverse StartOffset Level Velocity Sp Bank r aaa Acoustic Piano 10ff 127 T Slider a Mono Offset Off Level 127 gt 0008 Acoustic Piano ore off Multi zat sample Borr On Off for By dragging the slider to the left you can select each multisample and view its settings 3 Select Stereo as the Multisample Bank for multisample1 and multisample2 There are two main types of
85. you want to temporarily turn off these effects during a performance Note These parameters will always be turned on when the KROME starts up Arpeggiator recall settings Linking the arpeggiator with programs or combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings written into each program or combination will also be selected when you select that program or combination or whether the arpeggiator will stay in its current state without changing settings With the factory settings the former will occur You can choose the latter behavior if you want to play phrases and patterns with certain arpeggiator settings while you switch only the sound between different programs or combinations 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Basic page 2 In the Load ARP when changing area if the Program or Combination box is selected switching programs or combinations respectively will recall the arpeggiator settings written in that program or combination Disabling the arpeggiator and drum track 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Basic page 2 If the All ARP DT Off box is selected all arpeggiator and drum track functionality will be turned off Even if the ARP or DRUM TRACK buttons are on the arpeggiator and drum track will not function Recalling the last selected mode and page at power on GLOBAL G HEELAL e System Preferences V System Preferences Select the Bank Map
86. 0 0000 0000 0000 Bend Range PRG PRG Transpose Detune BPM Adjust These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre e Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e Insplit type combinations you can use Transpose to shift the pitch in semitone units of the programs specified for each key zone Note If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Transpose setting the relationship between the notes and drum sounds will change Use Program s Scale Scale This specifies the scale for each timbre If you check Use Program s Scale the scale specified by the program will be used Timbres where this parameter is not checked will use the Scale setting Scale T01 08 v JO AOOO Piano amp Strings J 078 00 T 1 A QO KROME Grand Piano i Ch Gch E J 1 4 S z 7 z Keyboard Organ Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Drums Strings Use Program s Scale O O O O D Q D P3 Timbre Param Random Type BETERE EEUE Key C 51 52 Playing and editing Combinations Delay You can set some Timbres so that they don t sound immediately at note on This can create cool effects and more dramatic layers You can specify the delay for each Timbre eith
87. 1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto gt PG p 199 Can t record in Sequencer mode Did you use Track Select to select the MIDI track that you want to record gt p 60 Is the Memory Protect Song check box Global P0 unchecked gt p 110 and PG p 197 Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto gt PG p 199 A combination copied using Copy From Com bi doesn t record via arpeggiator as it did when you were playing it in Combination mode Is Multi REC Seg P0 Play REC checked gt p 60 and PG p 118 Are the settings in the Copy from Combination dialog box correct gt PG p 166 e Inthe Copy from Combination dialog box check the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC option before you execute the copy This will cause the settings to be adjusted automatically Can t record Tone Adjust data Changes you make using Tone Adjust are recorded as system exclusive data Did you check the Global mode MIDI Filter Enable Exclusive check box gt PG p 201 RPPR does not start Is the Seq PO Play REC RPPR setting checked gt p 72 Are Assign Pattern Select and Track set correctly gt p 71 Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal or Auto gt PG p 199 SMF you loaded in Media mode won t play correctly Execute the menu command GM Initialize to restore the settings gt PG p 165 Set Bank Map to GM 2 and load the data again gt PG p 196 Arpeggiator The Arpeggiator does n
88. 100 User Pattern Pattern Convert to Drum Track Pattern Sequencer memory Internal memory saved inside the KROME Not saved internally save on external USB media G amp If the drum pattern memory is insufficient or if there are not enough pattern slots the error message Not enough Drum Track pattern memory or Not enough Drum Track pattern locations available will appear and the command cannot be executed Tip It s a good idea to convert drum patterns that you use frequently Use Load Drum Track Pattern to load them 103 Drum Track function 104 Drum Kit Overview What s a Drum Kit A drum kit is a collection of drumsamples drum set sounds such as bass drum snare or cymbals as well as a wide variety of other percussion sounds with each sample assigned to a note of the keyboard e Each key can play a different sound e On each key you can use up to eight Drumsamples with velocity crossfades Each key has separate settings for the most important sound parameters including volume filter cutoff and resonance envelope attack and decay pitch drive and low boost and gain for each band of the Program EQ For instance you could combine high drive and low cutoff frequency to create a lo fi effect on only a few sounds while the rest of the sounds remained clear and pristine Each note can be routed to different Insert Effects
89. 7 About the KROME s modes 0eeee ee eees 7 Basic OperatiONS 0 ccc cece ee ctw eee eeees 9 SEUD ac oiise ees ake ens a a adel Turning the power on off cceeeees 15 Connecting the AC adapter 0c eee 15 Turning the power On ce cece cece eee ees 15 Turning the power Off cc cece eee eee eee 15 Connections 5 soit oecatinds wheat ew kee ewes 17 AUCIO CONNECTIONS 0 cece eee EEEN eia 18 Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or 1OGt DEC ale ting oe kw tani woh boots ch aee 18 Connecting the KROME to a computer 20 Connecting MIDI devices 0 cece eee ees 20 Playing and editing Programs 21 Playing Programs ccccccceccccccecees 21 Selecting PrograMs ccc ccc eee ee 21 Program information cc cece cece eee eee 24 Using CONTONE aseran eee arrer E Er e 24 Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track 26 Easy Program editing cceccccccececs 27 Adjusting the EQ ccc cece eee cece eee eees 27 Adjusting the volume balance 006 27 Using realtime controls to edit the sound or EE gu torrets educate memes ieneaas 28 Using Tone Adjust ccc cece eee eee eeees 29 Comparing the unedited sound 30 Saving VOURCGINS lt j sic oa dadeuotea here anes rreson 30 Detailed Editing with Programs 31 Before you Start editing cece cece eens
90. 9 16 page to set keyboard and velocity ranges in conjunction with each other you can create even more variations 9 If you wish to save the edited combination settings in internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode and write the combination see page 115 and page 117 10 The Status MIDI Channel and Assign settings shown in the display of steps 2 and 3 can be made so that certain timbres will sound only when the arpeggiator is On and will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off Combination A001 Bossa Rose SW1 2 Category Keyboard Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing technique we will describe the settings of one of the preset combinations as an example When you play a specific region of the keyboard this combines settings that cause the arpeggiator to play an arpeggio using different sounds than what s being played by the keyboard with other settings that cause the arpeggiator sounds to remain completely unplayed when the arpeggiator is off Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI Basic MIDI Channel is set to 01 Select combination A001 Bossa Rose SW1 2 turn the ARP button on and play e Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 2 and 16 When you play the keyboard the bass riff arpeggio pattern will sound the timbre 2 program e The A Bottom Key and Top Key Combi P7 ARP DT ARP Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiator A will fun
91. A InitCombi D GG T 1 A00O A Piano 1 Ch 01G Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Bus IFX Output Select Ea Fx2 IFX3 IFX4 Q IFX4 OIFX5 OIFX5 OLIR Send1 MFX1 800 Send2 MFX2 000 Routing Routing IFX FX Control FXControl A f A A fa fa f fa 2 Use Bus IFX Output Select to specify the bus where each timbre will be output Choose IFX1 if you want to send the output of a timbre to insert effect 1 The routing insert effects and chain settings are shown graphically on the upper part of the page In this example T01 timbre 1 uses IFX1 and 2 T02 uses IFX2 T03 uses IFX3 and 4 T02 and T05 use IFX4 and T06 and T07 use IFX5 3 Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send level of each timbre to the master effects This can be set only if Bus IFX Output Select is set to L R or Off Note The actual send level is determined by multiplying this by the Send 1 or Send 2 settings for oscillators 1 and 2 within the program selected by the timbre If the program parameter Send 1 or Send 2 is set to 0 the resulting level will still be 0 even if you raise this send level If Bus IFX Output Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effects are set by Send1 and Send2 Insert FX Setup page following the insert effects 4 Press the FX Control 1 8 tabs to access the FX Control T01 08 pages Bus IFX Output Select is the same as
92. ATE I lt button REC button START STOP gt E button 14 TEMPO controls TEMPO knob This knob adjusts the tempo of the arpeggiator drum track or internal sequencer TEMPO LED This LED will blink at quarter note intervals of the current tempo TAP button By pressing or tapping this button on the beat you can enter the tempo used by the arpeggiator drum track or internal sequencer see page 25 15 Headphone Headphone jack Connect your headphones here This jack will output the same signal as the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks The headphone volume is controlled by the VOLUME knob Rear panel Front and rear panels Rear panel 1 Power supply Be sure to see Turning the power on on page 15 and follow the correct procedure described there Note The KROME has an auto power off function that automatically turns off the power when the keyboard or front panel buttons have not been used for a certain length of time With the factory settings this is set to 4 hours see Auto power off function on page 16 Power switch This switch turns the power on off See page 15 AC adapter connector The included AC adapter is connected here See page 15 amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may damage your speaker system or cause malfunctions Cable hook Use this t
93. AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R outputs 18 Access the Prog P9 MFX TFX LFO Routing page 19 Choose the desired total effect for TFX The procedure is the same as when selecting an insert effect See step 6 You can t use a double size effect as the total effect For details please see Double size effects above Routing effect settings Using effects in Combinations and Songs 20 Press the On Off button to turn the total effect on The total effect will toggle on off each time you press the button If this is Off the result will be the same as if 000 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without being processed by the total effect 21 Access the TFX page and edit the parameters of each effect to adjust the final sound as desired For details on the Program Effects settings see step 10 Using effects in Combinations and Songs In Combination and Sequencer modes you can specify the routing of each timbre track to the insert effects master effects and total effect These settings are adjusted in the same way in each of these modes We will be using the example of Combination mode in our explanation here Routing 1 Access the Combi P8 Routing IFX Routing T01 08 page COMBI Aaaa Routing 161 88 AY iG Ei fed Multiband Limiter HEJ L C R BPM Delay 3 fi Multiband Limiter a 4 Gi Ensemble z k S Gi Reverb Room 2 3 4 s le lelshoripeaialisie DOB
94. B MIDI Driver Windows Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Professional SP3 Windows Vista SP2 including 64 bit Windows 7 SP1 including 64 bit Computer USB port required a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended Macintosh Operating system Mac OS X 10 5 or later Computer Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor that has a USB port and satisfies the requirements for running Mac OS X Appearance and specifications are subject to change without notice 135 Music Workstation KROME Basic Channel Note Number Velocity Function Default Changed Memorized Messages Altered True Voice Note On xX 2K OK KKK K K OK K OK OK K K K 0 127 KK K KK k k K K K k k 9n V 1 127 Date 2011 10 04 MIDI Implementation Chart Ver 1 00 1 16 1 16 Remarks Memorized All note numbers 0 127 can be transmitted by the Arpeggiator or as sequence data Note Off Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Polyphonic aftertouch and Channel aftertouch A receive Monophonic Channel transmitted only as sequence data A receive Pitch Bend 0 32 Bank Select MSB LSB P 1 2 17 19 20 21 Joystick Y Y Knob1 4 Ha 4 5 7 8 10 Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan C 11 12 13 Expression Effect Control 1 2 C 64 65 66 67 Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft C Control 70 79 Sound Realtime Control TONE 1 4 74 71 79 72 C Change 80 83 Switch 1 2 Foo
95. COMBI RR eRD dele 1 AOOO Piano amp Strings T 1 AG G KROME Grand Piano Ch 61G Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Status oD OnT ONT ONT Ont N N Ont MIDI Channel 01G 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Bank Select When Status EX2 Le Deets Ts Dis Fe a 5 5 Access the P4 Zone Delay Key Z T01 08 page 6 Set Timbre 1 s Top Key to G9 and its Bottom Key to C4 COMBI MERATE AOOO Piano amp Strings T 3 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch 3 Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Top Key G9 G9 G9 B3 B3 G9 G9 G9 Top Slope a4 08 00 217 00 217 00 00 Bottom Slope 217 08 00 00 14 217 7 00 Bottom Key C4 C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 T key Zone Key Zone Yel Zone Yel Zone Delay Delay 1 8 5 9 16 yt 1 8 L 9 16 A 1 8 it 9 16 You can also enter a note value by selecting the parameter and then playing the desired note on the keyboard while holding down the ENTER button 7 Set Timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3 and a Bottom Key of C 1 Key Zone Slope In addition to hard splits where the sound changes abruptly you can use the Slope parameters to gradually fade a sound in or out over a range of keys In the example above you could set the Bottom Key of timbre 1 to G3 and set the Top Key of timbre 2 to G4 so that these two timbres overlap Next if you set the Bottom Slo
96. DI sequencer connected to the KROME can be recorded simultaneously using multi recording 1 Make sure that the MIDI OUT of your external sequencer is connected to the MIDI IN of the KROME If it is not connected turn off the power make the connection and then turn the power on 2 In the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page set MIDI Clock to External MIDI With this setting the KROME will synchronize to MIDI clock messages from your external sequencer Make sure that Receive Ext Realtime Commands is checked GLOBALE MIDI Setup Basic MIDI Channel ogi m Local Control On Note Receive All Convert Position PreMIDI MIDI Clock Q Internal Auto External MIDI External USB m Receive Ext Realtime Comman SEQ Mode Track MIDI Out for Master Param MIDI Out Control Change DrumTrack Prog MIDI Ch ia __ Prog MIDI Out gine Lew O y O 3 Create a new song in Sequencer mode and in the P0 Play REC Preferences page check the Multi REC check box Set Recording Setup to Overwrite SEQ meer oak Preferences Vv iG Meter 4 4 J EXT Manual 215000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 Resolution Hi _ RPPR Mere v G T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano E Recording Setup Overwrite Overdub Manual Punch In Metronome Setup Sound Only REC Bus Output Select L R Level 127 Precount Measure 2 1 8 jt 9 16 A A A A A B A Adjust J rences 1 8 E 9 16 4 Press Pl
97. Global P3 Scales page lets you create your own original scales You can create sixteen User Octave Scales which allow you to specify the pitch of each note in an octave which will then be applied across all octaves and you can create one User All Note Scale which allows you to individually specify the pitch for every one of the 128 notes By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of 99 cents you can raise or lower it by approximately one semitone relative to the normal pitch The user scales you create here can be used by specifying the scale for a program for each timbre of a combination or for each track of a song GLOBAL vig S User Octave Scale ______ User octave Scales select TIJ S User All Notes Scale ddd Key lock button C4 00 KT N dibh did i You can choose these scales from the following pages C moe o r P1 Basic Controllers Note On Scale Program Scale Carabinauen P3 Timbre Parameters Scale T01 08 T09 16 Scale Use Program s Scale eaauenece P3 Track Parameters Scale T01 08 T09 q 16 Scale Use Program s Scale Here is how to set the scale type for each timbre in Sequencer mode 1 Create a user octave scale or a user all notes scale Select a key and use the VALUE controllers to adjust the pitch The range of 99 raises or lowers the pitch approximately one semitone above or below the standard pitch Note You
98. K button For details on the Trigger settings please see 7 4b Trigger on page 56 of the Parameter Guide 99 Drum Track function Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Program mode Starting stopping the drum track 1 Access the Prog P7 ARP DT Drum Track Pattern page PROG DAN S Drum Pattern Pattern REB P039 8 Beat Pop 1 All Shift 80 Drum Track Pattern VY G Trigger Mode Wait KBD Trigger Latch On Sync On Zone Keyboard Bottom C 1 Top G9 Velocity Bottom 001 Top 127 Le a es Pa 2 Trigger Mode specifies how the Drum Track pattern will be triggered Start Immediately When you press the DRUM TRACK button to turn it on the LED will light up and the Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting It will stop when you press the DRUM TRACK button to turn it off Wait KBD Trigger When you press the DRUM TRACK button to turn it on the LED will blink and the Drum Track pattern will wait to start When you play the keyboard or receive a MIDI note on the Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting 3 Specify the Sync setting Off The Drum Track pattern will not synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running but will start immediately On The Drum Track pattern will synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running PROG LEE iiD Drum Track Pattern VY G Dr
99. KRONE MUSIC WORKSTATION Operation Guide M DC IN O OUTPUT L MONO R PEDAL SWITCH DAMPER N Mo ouT sad lt O TONE CUTOF RESONANCE EG INT RELEASE i a COMBI oisi Y N ae o KORG jast A co G amp S S LTT Bh kK SESI Poan ded LIEMS OJO About this manual The manuals and how to use them The KROME comes with the following manuals e Video Manual approximately 60 minutes e Quick Start Guide printed and PDF e Operation Guide PDF e Parameter Guide PDF e Voice Name List PDF All of these manuals are on the included accessory disc A printed copy is included only for the Quick Start Guide Video Manual This video illustrates the main functionality of the KROME Quick Start Guide This provides a simple explanation of the KROME s functions To begin please watch the Video Manual and read the Quick Start Guide Operation Guide Put simply the Operation Guide is designed to answer the question How do I do this It explains the names and functions of each part of the KROME basic operation an overview of each mode how to edit sounds record on the sequencer and so on This guide also explains the basics of effects the Arpeggiator Drum Track and Drum Kits Finally it also contains a troubleshooting guide as well as supplemental information such as a list of specifications Parameter Guide The Parameter Guide is desi
100. M bank on page 22 5 When you are satisfied with the selected Program press the OK button to close the menu If instead you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected before you opened the menu Playing Programs Selecting Programs Find Here s how to search for a program by a portion of its name 1 Access the Bank Program Select menu or the Category Program Select menu etc 2 Press a tab to select the bank or category that you want to search Note The programs included in the selected tab will be the subject of the search 3 On the lower left side press the Find button to access the dialog box T sw m Ignore Case Find 4 Found items with sw fin AQQS Drawbars 91 2 Prev Next Cancel OK 4 Press the T button to access the text dialog box Enter the alphanumeric characters that you want to find and press the OK button For example if you want to find programs that take effective advantage of SW1 or SW2 enter sw 5 If you select the Ignore Case check box uppercase and lowercase characters will not be distinguished in the search 6 Press the Find button to begin searching Search results are shown in Found If one or more items are found the number of items and the first found program will be displayed Press the Prev button or Next button t
101. ME Gran S U U a Se U a I Prog Prog ARP ARP Tone 1 8 9 16 A B Adjust 2 Specify the MIDI channel of the drum track timbre _ Be aware that if another timbre uses the same MIDI channel that timbre will also be played COMBI LAELA t lela MRC Vv iG AOOO Piano amp Strings J 678 00 T 5 E105 Tekno Klub Kit Ch 18 Status OwT ONT OWT OWT OINT OT Ot Ont MIDI Channel Gch Gch o2 03 E ae o7 8 Bank Select When Status EX2 3 Access the Combi P7 ARP DT Drum Track page Specify the drum track s MIDI channel Output Set this to match the MIDI Channel of the timbre you specified in step 2 COMB e Iai Drum Track VY G Drum Pattern Pattern Preset P096 HipHop Rock All Shift 00 HMIDI Channel Output 1a Trigger Mode wait KBD Trigger Sync On Latch On zone Keyboard Bottom C 1 Top G9 Velocity Bottom 001 Top 127 4 Select a Drum Track pattern Use Pattern Pattern Bank to select the preset or user bank and use Pattern No to select the pattern number Note If you select an empty pattern the DRUM TRACK button will not function 5 Press the DRUM TRACK button to verify that the pattern plays correctly The method of triggering will depend on the Trigger settings If the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Start Immediately the Drum Track pattern will start when you press the DRUM TRAC
102. NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty 2012 KORG INC KORG INC 4015 2 Yanokuchi Inagi city Tokyo 206 0812 Japan
103. Out poet H pie ss Effect m Effect h Wet Mono In Stereo Out Stereo In Stereo Out Note The Parameter Guide includes block diagrams for each individual effect which include the effects input output structure See page 251 of the Parameter Guide 77 Using Effects Effects in each mode Program mode For programs you can use insert effects to process the final sound in the same way that you use the Filter Driver Amplifier and EQ equalizer to process the sound from the oscillators OSC 1 amp 2 Next the master effects are used to create overall ambience such as reverb and you use the total effect to make final adjustments You can apply an effect in the same way to the output of a drum track program All of these settings can be made independently for each program Combination and Sequencer modes In Combination and Sequencer modes you can use the track EQ and insert effects to process the sound of each timbre track program Then you can use the master effects to create overall ambience and use the total effect to make final adjustments In Combination mode you can adjust these settings for each combination and in Sequencer mode you can adjust them for each song In Sequencer mode you can switch between effects or modify the effect parameters and record these changes so that effects will switch automatically or effect parameters will be modified automatically as the song plays back Pr
104. P8 Routing IFX Insert FX Setup page select another effect for IFX1 and modify the effect parameter values SEQ ieee tthe Pale Insert FX Setup A IO Track 1 MIDI TRACK 01 AOOO KROME Grand Piano Insert Effect Chain To Chain Pan 8 Bus Sel ho 1 1 Senda IFX2 m Off a955 Stereo Tremolo 2 ow IFX3 o L R Off gt 021 St Guitar Cabinet IFX4 i 3 wm gt 88 No Effect 4 gt 88 No Effect 5 am gt 888 No Effect Routing Routing 1 8 9 16 i L R Off OL R Off L R Off FX Control FX Control U IFX1 IFX2 IFX3 IFX4 IFX5 ais ae lt gt gt f a gt ln gt Note In addition to effect parameter changes you can also record parameters such as sound parameters For details on the parameters that can be recorded please see page 191 of the Parameter Guide 3 Stop recording Note Exclusive messages are always recorded on the current track selected by Track Select In this example they are recorded on MIDI track 9 Note In the MIDI event edit page you can view the recorded exclusive events and their location Exclusive events are displayed as EXCL To view these events go to the P6 Track Edit Track Edit page and select the menu command MIDI Event Edit Then in the Set Event Filters dialog box check Exclusive and press the OK button amp Exclusive events cannot be changed to a different type of event Nor can other events be change
105. P8 1 2 Parameters Insert Effects Master Effects Parameters FX Control Bus About the edit pages In the Combi P0 Play page you can select and play combinations Here you can also use the control surface s knobs and the tone adjust function for quick editing or to edit the settings of the arpeggiator or drum track In the other pages you can edit the sound in greater detail For details on each mode and how to access each page please see Basic operations on page 9 Controllers P1 1 DrumTrack P7 7 Tone Adjust P0 7 Arpeggio P7 1 2 3 4 5 i Total save AUDIO OUTPUT ee gt L MONO R 1 5 P8 P9 P1 1 P2 2 etc indicate the on screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME 47 48 Playing and editing Combinations A suggested approach for editing First select a Program for each Timbre on the PO Play Program T01 08 or T09 16 page Note that you don t have to use all 16 Timbres Next create any desired keyboard or velocity splits layers or crossfades between the different Timbres You can do this on the P4 Zone Delay Keyboard Zones page After this adjust the volumes of the Timbres back on the Program Select Mixer tab and set up any other Timbre parameters as desired To add finishing touches to the sound set up the Insert Master and Total Effect as desired on the P8 Routing IFX and P9 MFX TFX LFO pages respectively These effects can be different fr
106. PO Basic Setup and use Brightness to adjust the contrast of the display gt PG p 216 The power is turned on but the display does not work normally or an error message is dis played There is no sound when you play the keyboard and the KROME does not function normally This type of problem may occur if a data writing operation to internal memory was not completed correctly for example if the power of the KROME was turned off while a program or other data was being written If this occurs use the following procedure to initialize the KROME s internal memory 1 Turn off the power 2 Initialize the KROME While holding down the EXIT button and the PAGE button located beside it turn on the power of the KROME The KROME will be initialized and data will be written into internal memory While the data is being written the display will indicate Now writ ing into internal memory After initialization all user data will be empty and you will need to re load the preload data Execute the Global mode menu command Load Preload Demo Data to load the data gt p 125 Operations in the display don t work the po sition has drifted the response is poor On the Global PO Basic Setup page use the Touch Panel Calibration menu command to adjust the touch panel response gt PG p 217 In order to perform the calibration optimally use a stylus pen to accurately press the center of the symbol calibration targ
107. Parameter Guide If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost 7 If you wish to save the state of the program at the same time return to Program mode and write the program See page 115 Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pattern Melody pattern 1 Press the alternate button 2 In the touch grid set tone 0 for Step 01 02 03 04 05 07 and 08 i e all but 06 3 Specify the pitch Set the Step 02 Pitch to 10 Step 05 Pitch to 12 and the Step 08 Pitch to 2 U1001 USER Length 08 J 109 00 1 g me ARAA gt Step 02 Pitch 10 Gate 050 Velocity 064 Flam 00 Cancel OK 4 Play a single key the arpeggio will begin playing Chordal pattern Press the alternate button In the touch grid set tone 00 of Step 01 In Step 03 04 06 and 07 set tones 00 04 Select Step 01 and set Gate to Legato Select Step 06 and set Gate to Legato Note To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed guitar chord select Flam In Program mode select an acoustic guitar program and choose the user arpeggio pattern that you created here In the Arpeg Program P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page set Gate to Step oF Q N 93 94 Arpeggiator function Then return to the Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page For odd numbered steps set Flam to a p
108. Press the popup button to select the length of time after which the power will turn off If you don t want the power to turn off automatically choose the Disabled setting Changing the setting during operation 1 Press the GLOBAL button Alternatively press the mode button and choose GLOBAL 2 Press the EXIT button to access P0 Basic Setup 3 Press the System Pref tab to access the System Preferences page 4 In Auto Power Off specify the amount of time when you want the power to turn off If you don t want the auto power off function to automatically turn off the power choose the Disabled setting GLOBAL AA REELLT e S System Preferences Bank Map System Preferences KORG Reset ea m Value Edit Pop up Power On Mode Auto Power Off m Beep Enable Animation Beat TINE Pop up S Memory Protect _ Program Combination Drum Kit _ ARP User Pattern Auto power off warning message When the specified length of time has elapsed without any user input on the KROME a message will appear warning you that the auto power off function is about to turn off the power The system has been idle for more than 38 minutes and will shut down in You can change the Auto Power Off on the following page GLOBAL PF Basic Setup System Preferences If you want to continue using the system press the keyboard a button or the display The Auto power off fu
109. Semi Distortion Guitar To select a program make sure that you are in Program mode and press the PROG BANK C button numeric key 2 7 and then the ENTER button 2 While holding down a key move the joystick in the Y direction toward yourself The tremolo effect will deepen 3 While keeping the joystick in the Y direction toward yourself press the SW2 button The SW2 button LED will light up When you press the button its LED will light up and the modulation effect at this point will be maintained 4 Release the joystick and play the keyboard The modulation will stay the same as it was when SW2 was pressed Even if you move the joystick toward yourself the sound will not change 5 Press the SW2 button once again to release the Lock function Keyboard The KROME s keyboard provides the following two types of control Velocity Velocity is a measure of how hard you play a note on the keyboard This can be used to modulate many different aspects of the sound such as volume brightness or the character of the attack Note Number Sounds can be programmed to change in character based on the note being played As you play higher or lower on the keyboard the note number can modulate the timbre such as becoming brighter as you play higher notes Envelopes may also become faster or slower the volume may change and so on Realtime control knobs The realtime controls consist of four knobs and
110. Song recording and editing Song recording is performed on tracks You can record tracks in either of two ways realtime recording or step recording For realtime recording you can choose one of six recording modes You can edit tracks by using Event Edit operations to modify the recorded data or insert new data and by using Track Edit functions such as Create Control Data which generates and inserts pitch bend aftertouch or control change data Patterns There are two types of patterns preset patterns and user patterns Preset patterns Patterns suitable for drum tracks are preset in internal memory and can be selected for any song User patterns Each song can have up to 100 patterns When using a pattern in a different song use the Utility menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From Song etc to copy the pattern The pattern length can be specified in units of a measure Each pattern consists of musical data for one track It is not possible to create patterns that contain multiple tracks You can use these patterns by placing them in a track Put to Track menu command or by copying them Copy to Track menu command You can also use patterns with the RPPR function of a song see page 71 53 54 Creating songs Sequencer mode Recording and editing a pattern You can record a pattern in either of two ways realtime recording or step recording However unlike realtime recording to a track you can select only
111. Step EE Pitch 00 Gate 050 Velocity 064 Flam 00 Fixed Note Setup Cancel OK Let s input the following rhythm pattern 4 For each Tone specify Fixed Note No Use the Fixed Note Setup button to open the dialog box Here you can assign a different dr umsample note number of the drum kit to each fixed note For this example set Tone No and Fixed Note No as follows o CS 03 A 3 open hi hat Fixed Notes 11 10 VIEW 48 J 109 00 41 t E AARAA gt Step 1 Pitch 00 Gate 050 Velocity 064 Flam 00 P oN o Te eS Se Cancel The drumsample corresponding to each note number will differ depending on the drum kit It s best to play the keyboard to find the drum sound you want then hold down Fixed Note No and play that note to enter the desired note number 5 Press the alternate button 6 Enter the kick Tone00 In the touch grid set tone 00 C2 of Step 01 and 05 7 Enter the snare Tone01 In the touch grid set tone 01 F2 of Step 03 and 07 8 Enter the closed hi hat Tone02 In the touch grid set tone 02 F 3 of Step 01 02 03 05 06 and 07 9 Enter the open hi hat Tone03 In the touch grid set tone 03 A 3 for Step 04 10 If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger As Played playing a single note on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 to play Playing two notes on the keyboard will
112. Track program You can adjust a three band EQ for the Drum Track program If you turn Auto Load Program EQ on selected the three band EQ settings specified for the program will be automatically loaded when you switch Drum Track programs Normally you will leave this selected You are free to adjust the three band EQ settings that are loaded automatically These adjustments are applied relative to the original settings of the program PROG LAED Drum Track Program VY G Drum Track Parameters Program PIRAAT EAA Volume 127 Detune 0000 E A E Bus _ Auto Load Program EQ Bus Select L R FX Control Bus Off Mid Frea H2 Send1 000 Send2 010 _ Bypass Input Trim 99 High Gain dB O 01 0 3 20k Low Gain dB Mid Gain dB xA xA 02 5 03 0 ARP DrumTrk DrumTrk Setup Pattern Prog Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Combination mode MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Program mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive If you re controlling the triggering by playing the keyboard the drum track will receive on the global MIDI channel Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by Drum Track Prog MIDI Ch default channel 10 Note data etc of the Drum Track program will be transmitted Note MIDI transmission of the pattern data is enabled if Drum
113. Track Prog MIDI Out is selected The default setting is off unselected The Drum Track program does not transmit or receive program changes Drum Track function settings in Combination mode Unlike Program mode Combination mode does not have a dedicated track for the Drum Track function You ll need to specify a timbre 1 16 as the one for use by the Drum Track program Then set the drum track s output MIDI channel Output to match the timbre s MIDI channel MIDI Channel so that the Drum Track program can be played For details please see Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program on page 98 MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Combination mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive If you re controlling the triggering by playing the keyboard the drum track will receive on the global MIDI channel Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by the Drum Pattern Output setting of each combination Set this to match the MIDI channel of the timbre you ve specified for the drum program If the timbre s Status is EXT or EX2 the note data etc of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted Drum Track function settings in Sequencer mode The parameters for the Drum Track function are structured in the same way as in Combination mode Assign the Drum Track program to the desired track 1 16 However wh
114. a mode Save Exclusive all remaining internal memory was used up To solve this problem e Ifyou are receiving two or more sets of exclusive data transmit them separately to the KROME Memory Protected Meaning The internal program combination song drum kit user arpeggio pattern is protected e In Global mode turn off write protect and execute the write or load procedure once again MIDI data receiving error Meaning While receiving MIDI System Exclusive data the format of the received data was invalid for example because the size of the data was incorrect 131 132 Appendices N No data Meaning When loading a Standard MIDI File the file contained no events No media Meaning When executing a command in Media mode no media was inserted in the drive To solve this problem e Insert media and navigate to an appropriate directory that the KROME will recognize gt p 118 No recording track specified Meaning When performing realtime multi track recording you attempted to begin recording with no tracks set to REC To solve this problem e Set the desired tracks for recording to REC No space available on media Meaning When you attempted to save or copy a file or to create a directory there was not enough free space on the other media To solve this problem e Either delete an existing file or replace the media with another that contains sufficient free space Not enough Drum Track pa
115. a single program parameter The Program parameter and the Tone Adjust parameter reflect each other exactly If you edit one the other parameter will reflect the identical change This type of Tone Adjust parameter absolutely controls the program parameter itself e Relative This type of Tone Adjust parameter controls two or more program parameters simultaneously For example Filter Amp EG Attack Time controls a total of six program parameters The value of a relative parameter indicates the amount of change that is applied to the value of each program parameter it s affecting When a relative parameter is at zero i e when its slider is in the center position the program parameters it controls will function according to their original settings Raising or lowering the value of a relative parameter will indirectly raise or lower the value of these program parameters e Meta This type of Tone Adjust parameter affects other Tone Adjust parameters It does not affect program parameters directly If you ve adjusted an absolute or a relative Tone Adjust parameter the result of your adjustment will be written as follows Program mode e The settings of relative type Tone Adjust parameters are automatically applied directly to the program parameters when you write the program The Tone Adjust values will be reset to zero e The settings of absolute type Tone Adjust parameters are written as themselves i e as
116. about MIDI interfaces refer to the owner s manual of the MIDI interface you re using amp Some USB MIDI interfaces may be unable to transmit or receive the KROME s MIDI exclusive messages Connecting MIDI devices By connecting the KROME s MIDI connectors to an external MIDI device you can transfer sound settings and performance data such as note messages between your external MIDI device and the KROME About MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard for exchanging various types of musical data between electronic musical instruments and computers When MIDI cables are used to connect two or more MIDI devices performance data can be exchanged between the devices even if they were made by different manufacturers Controlling an external MIDI tone generator from KROME If you want to use the KROME s keyboard chord trigger switches and other controllers sequencer and arpeggiator to play or control an external MIDI sound module use a MIDI cable to connect the KROME s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of your external MIDI sound module _MIDI OUT p MIDI IN me ef EHEHEH i o TTT 2 CA KROME MIDI keyboard Controlling KROME s tone generator from an external MIDI device When you wish to play or control the KROME s tone generator from an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer etc use a MIDI
117. age or Resolution P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page amp If the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to External MIDI External USB or set to Auto and MIDI Clock messages are being received the display will indicate J EXT meaning that the KROME is synchronized to an external MIDI device In this case you won t be able to change the tempo by using the KROME 85 Arpeggiator function Using knobs 1 4 to control the arpeggiator e You can control the arpeggiator by pressing the SELECT button to select ARP and then turning knobs 1 4 REALTIME CONTROLS TONE CUTOFF RESONANCE EG INT RELEASE O USER 1 2 3 4 O ARP GATE VELOCITY SWING STEP OO 0 O Adjusting the duration of the arpeggiated notes e Turn knob 1 to adjust the duration of the arpeggiated notes Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the duration of the notes and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the duration of the notes At the center position 12 o clock the note length will be as specified by the program parameter Gate Prog P7 ARP DT ARP Setup page Note The knob setting is saved when you write each program Note It is effective to use the SELECT button to select TONE and then adjust knob 4 RELEASE Changing the dynamics of the arpeggiated notes e Turn knob 2 to adjust the dynamics of the arpeggiated notes Turning the knob toward the left will make the notes softer and turning it t
118. ages to select Programs remotely For details please see below As with Programs each Combination has five insert effects two master effects and one total effect for shaping and transforming the sounds of the individual Timbres This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing Combinations including a tour of the front panel controllers and basic editing techniques Selecting a program using Combination Select and the VALUE controllers 1 Press the COMBI button The LED will light up Refer to the illustration below for the buttons Alternatively you can use the mode button see Selecting modes on page 9 The KROME will enter Combination mode 2 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page This is shown in the top line of the display Mode button Mode page number Tab name and name COMBI cee YY IC Category J 878 80 Bank Bank A gt Keyboard rare number o 000 Piano amp Strings m Combination Select Combination number and name Category Select popup button Category number and name Combination Select popup button If a different page is shown press the EXIT button several times to move to the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page 3 Make sure that Combination Select is selected If it is not press Combination Select in the display to highlight it 4 Select the combination you want to play You can use the following methods t
119. ality drum programs You can perform along with the drum patterns or synchronize Drum Track patterns with the phrases generated by arpeggiator For more about the Drum Track function please see page 97 45 46 Playing and editing Combinations Easy Combination editing You can edit any of the Combinations shipped with KROME You can create your own combinations by editing a preloaded combination or by starting from an initialized combination A combination has sixteen timbres you can assign a program to each timbre and specify its volume and pan the key range in which the program will sound and how its sound will be routed to the effects You can create simple setups such as detuned sounds split or layers or highly complex orchestra like setups Even without moving to the various pages for detailed editing you can make dramatic changes just from within the Combi P0 Play page You can also edit using the control surface s knobs on the front panel Changing the program of each timbre Changing the Programs assigned to timbres 1 16 is a quick way to dramatically alter the sound of the Combination 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 T09 16 page In this page you can view the program assigned to each timbre 1 16 and the play mute and solo status of each Selected Timbre Info T 1 AGGG KROME Grand Piano Timbre No Cateq Category Timbre gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 P
120. am combination press the text edit button The text dialog box will appear Enter the name of the program combination For details please see Editing names on page 117 After you have entered the name press the OK button to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box 5 In Category specify the category of the Program Combination 6 Select a Sub Category as well For combinations the category and sub category you specify here can be selected in the following pages Prog P0 Play Category Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 09 16 Category Seq P0 Play REC Program T01 08 09 16 Category For Programs the category sub category you specify here can be selected in the following pages Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 09 16 Category 7 Use To to specify the bank and number of the writing destination program combination Use the VALUE controllers or the BANK buttons to make your selection 8 To execute the Write operation press the WRITE button Alternatively press the OK button in the Write dialog box 115 116 Loading amp saving data To cancel without executing press the Cancel button or EXIT button About the Tone Adjust settings that are saved There are three types of Tone Adjust parameters as listed below The way in which settings are written will depend on the type e Absolute This type of Tone Adjust parameter controls
121. an write parameter settings into internal memory by using the menu command Write FX Preset amp The musical data and setup data of a song you create in Sequencer mode cannot be saved in the KROME s internal memory You ll need to save this data to a commercially available SD card or by using MIDI data dump About preloaded data and preset data Preloaded data refers to the data that is loaded in the KROME when it is shipped from the factory You are free to rewrite this data and with the exception of the demo songs the data will be written to the location as described in Writing to internal memory This data is stored in the KROME s system area You can reload the factory preload data into internal memory by using the Global mode menu command Load Preload Demo Data Preset data on the other hand is data that cannot be overwritten by the Write operation This includes the following data e GM program banks GM g 1 g 9 g d e GM drum kits 48 GM 56 GM e Preset template songs POO P15 e Preset patterns P000 P605 Saving to SD card The following data can be saved to an SD card commercially available inserted in the KROME s SD card slot e PCG file Programs Combinations Drum kits Global settings user Drum Track patterns and user arpeggio patterns The data that was checked in the check boxes of the Save dialog box will be saved e SNG file Song and cue list e EXL file System exclusive da
122. aning When you pressed the WRITE button to save your data in Sequencer mode the media was not ina state that allowed saving or the previously opened directory was not a location where SNG files could be saved e If the save destination directory is something other than the DOS directory from which you opened a PCG or SNG file a message such as File path not found will appear and the data cannot be saved In this case move to Media mode select an appropriate save destination and then execute Save All or Save SEQ Illegal file description Meaning The filename that you specified when saving a file or creating a directory contained invalid characters To solve this problem e Change the filename you are specifying Filenames not permitted by MS DOS cannot be used as a filename Illegal SMF data Meaning You attempted to load a file that was not a Standard MIDI File Illegal SMF division Meaning You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File that was timecode based Illegal SMF format Meaning You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File of a format other than 0 or 1 M Master Track can t be recorded alone Meaning When realtime recording a single track you attempted to begin recording with the master track as the current track e Select a MIDI track for recording instead of the Master Track Measure number over limit Meaning The attempted edit procedure would cause the track length to exceed 999 mea
123. as now been recorded on the Master track If you press the START STOP gt I button during the pre count the time signature won t be recorded 7 Set the REC Resolution if necessary When you record in real time on a track this parameter specifies how the timing of the recorded MIDI data will be corrected The timing will also be corrected when you record automation data in real tme on an audio track Data that was already recorded will not be corrected a Nr C For example let s suppose that you recorded some eighth notes in real time but your timing was not quite perfect as shown in part 1 of the illustration below If REC Resolution were set to J when you recorded the timing would automatically be corrected as shown in part 2 of the illustration If REC Resolution is set to Hi the notes will be recorded with the timing at which you play them 8 Make other settings as necessary You can adjust the settings for the arpeggiator P7 ARP DT MIDI filtering P5 MIDI Filter etc See page 89 You may also wish to use Tone Adjust to tweak the sound When you are finished making these settings the basic setup is complete Saving your song parameter settings The song parameter settings you create here can be saved as a template If you use these settings frequently you can simply load one of the templates you ve saved For details please see Save Template Song Save as User Templat
124. ase see Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal on page 18 Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track Based on note data that it receives from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator can generate a wide range of phrases and patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns By setting SELECT to ARP and using the knobs you can vary the duration and strength of the arpeggiated notes For more about the arpeggiator please see page 85 The drum track uses a rich variety of drum patterns to play the KROME s high quality drum programs You can select any program and play along with the drum patterns Of course you can also synchronize the arpeggiator and the drum track patterns and use them together For more about the drum track please see page 97 Easy Program editing The fastest way to create the sound you need is to start from a preload program that s close to what you have in mind and edit that program Simple editing can be done within the various pages of PO Play where you perform You can adjust the EQ and volume level and in the Tone Adjust page you can use the sliders and buttons to perform various useful edits You can also use the front panel realtime controls to intuitively adjust the cutoff resonance and release time If you want to do detailed editing use the editing pages P1 and following Adjusting the EQ
125. attempted to create a directory that would exceed the maximum path name length 76 characters for the full path name Unable to save file Meaning When executing the Media mode Utility menu command Copy the copy destination path length exceeded 76 characters Meaning When saving a file in Media mode the save destination path exceeded 76 characters Meaning When you executed the Media mode Utility menu command Copy the file management data exceeded the size of the management area Y You can t undo this operation Are you sure Meaning Once you enter event editing even if you leave event editing without actually editing an event it will no longer be possible to execute Compare to listen to the previous edit If you wish to enter event editing press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button You can t undo last operation Are you sure Meaning When you exit recording or event editing in Sequencer mode the memory area for Undo Compare function is not allocated If you wish to keep the data that was just recorded or edited press the OK button If you wish to return to the previous data i e to delete the data that was just recorded or edited press the Cancel button Meaning When editing in Sequencer mode memory area for Undo Compare function cannot be allocated If you wish to execute the edit press the OK button It will not be possible to undo your edit If you decide not to execute the edit
126. attern Meaning There was insufficient sequencer memory to open the pattern so editing is not possible e Either delete unwanted data such as a song track or pattern or do not open the pattern Not enough pattern locations available Meaning When executing Load Drum Track Pattern the attempted load procedure would exceed the remaining number of user patterns in the selected song e Create anew song and reload the data into the user patterns of that song You can load up to 100 user patterns into each song If you have more drum track patterns than this to load you can divide them between two or more songs Not enough song locations available Meaning When loading a SNG file with Append specified you attempted to load more songs than can be loaded e In Sequencer mode execute Delete Song to increase the number of songs that can be used and then load the song again P Pattern conflicts with events Meaning It was not possible to execute the Bounce procedure because one of the tracks contained a pattern and the same measure of the other track contained events or a pattern e Open the pattern Pattern exists across destination to end of measure or source from measure Meaning When moving a measure the edit procedure could not be executed because a pattern had been put in the destination end measure or the source start measure and had not been opened e Open the pattern Pattern exists in destinati
127. ay Rec Mute to select REC for the tracks you want to record Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign Auto Punch In m Multi REC For the tracks you don t want to record select Play or Mute SEQ HAETAAN Program Ek V IO GH Meter 4 4 J EXT 215000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 1 Resolution Hi _ RPPR T 1 AGG InitProgram AOOO Ch 61 RPPR NoAssign 1 E E 5 E 7 Category gt 16 gt 16 gt 16 ate gt 16 f gt 16 gt 16 gt 16 lUser 16 J user 16 J user 16 J user 16 J user 16 J user 16 J user 16 J user 16 j Bank Program gt AGB D ABBO D ABBO D ABOG D AGBA D AGBG gt ABBB gt ABO InitProgram InitProgram InitProgram InitProgram InitProgram InitProgram InitProgram InitProgram eeo Prog Prog ARP ARP Tone Prefe PlayLoop PlayLoop ce 1 8 A 9 16 A it A A ih B A Adjust j rences 1 8 JE 9 16 5 In the P3 Track Parameters MIDI T01 08 and T09 16 page use MIDI Channel to specify the MIDI channel of each track Set the MIDI channel of each KROME track to match the MIDI channel of each external sequencer track Data from each channel will be recorded on the corresponding KROME track Make sure that Status is set to INT or BTH 6 Press the LOCATE f lt button to set the location to 001 01 000 7 Press the SEQUENCER REC button to enter record standby mode 8 Start your external sequencer The KROME s sequenc
128. bed above the Foot Pedal can be used for many different functions including Master Volume Channel Volume Pan or Expression Assignable sound modulation as several different AMS or Dmod sources Effects Send level control Use various KROME controls realtime control knobs Joystick SW1 SW2 etc Connect an optional XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jacks After turning the power on use Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page Foot Pedal Assign to assign the function controlled by the foot pedal See page 111 and pages 202 350 of the Parameter Guide 19 20 Setup Connecting the KROME to a computer USB connection The KROME provides both MIDI and USB connectors as standard equipment By connecting the KROME to your computer via USB you can use it as a controller and MIDI sound module for your DAW software with single cable convenience and with out the need for a MIDI interface By using the dedicated editor you can edit some of the parameters of the KROME from your computer as though it were a software plug in Note The USB connector of the KROME is only able to transmit and receive MIDI data amp Before you connect the KROME to your computer via USB you must install the KORG USB MIDI driver on your computer Connecting via the MIDI connectors You can connect the KROME to your computer via MIDI by using a commercially available MIDI interface Note For more
129. bout the selections just from the way they appear in the menu Parameters which affect only OSC1 or OSC2 are prefixed with OSC1 and OSC2 respectively Parameters which affect both Oscillators but which are specific to Programs are prefixed with OSC1 amp 2 The other group of parameters at the beginning of the list are Common That is you can use them with most Programs Parameters can only be assigned to one Tone Adjust control at a time If a parameter is already assigned it s erayed out 3 Select a parameter from the menu The parameter is now assigned to the control To close the list without making any changes press a location in the display outside the popup window or press the EXIT button Comparing the unedited sound Using COMPARE When you re in the process of editing a sound pressing the COMPARE button will recall the last saved version of the sound as it was before you started editing For details please see Compare function on page 11 Saving your edits After you ve edited a program you must save it if you want to keep the changes you ve made If you re select the program or turn off the power after editing your edits will be lost 1 Press the WRITE button The Write Program dialog box will appear If you want to modify the writing destination or name you can do so see page 117 2 Press the WRITE button once again to save write the program For detail
130. cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector of KROME _ MIDI IN MIDI OUT iT 2 T I KROME MIDI keyboard of EFH i Controlling two or more external MIDI tone generators from KROME You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control multiple MIDI devices KROME MIDI IN d MIDI OUT lt 0000 jm MIDI MIDI OUT patch bay 1 00000 MIDI tor tone generator Playing and editing Programs About the KROME s Programs Programs are the basic sounds of the KROME You can play them by themselves layer them together in Combinations or play a different Program on each of the 16 MIDI tracks either from the internal sequencer or from external computer based sequencers This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing Programs including tours of the front panel controllers and basic editing techniques Playing Programs Selecting Programs There are several different ways to select Programs Each one is convenient in a different way e Using Program Select and the VALUE controllers e Using the Bank Program Select menu e Using the Category Program Select menu e Find e Using a foot switch page 19 e MIDI program change messages let you select Programs remotely from either a MIDI sequen
131. can also select the key by holding down the ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard Alternatively you can turn on the key lock button and then play a note on the keyboard Note You can copy one of the preset scales and edit it to create an original scale To do so use the page menu command Copy Scale 2 Access the Sequencer mode P3 Track Parameters Other T01 08 or T09 16 page 3 If you want the Track to use the scale saved with its individual Program check the track s Use Program s Scale check box Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified by Scale Type Song s Scale 4 Set Type Song s Scale to select the scale for the currently selected song Setting Category Names In the Global P4 Category pages you can assign names to the categories and sub categories of programs and combinations GLOBAL RZ Bee rf gt Program Main i4 iG Category SeT Keyboard 09 T SlowSynth name settings 01 T Organ 10 T FastSynth 02 T Bell Mallet 11 T LeadSynth 03 T Strings 12 T MotionSynth 04 7 Vocal Airy 13 T SFX 05 T Brass 14 T Short Decay Hit 06 T Woodwind Reed 15 T Drums 67 T Guitar Plucked 16 T User 16 8 T Bass Synth Bass 17 T User 17 ha fos ex mo e a Editing the Category sub category names is very simple 1 Press the T Text button next to the name you d like to edit The text editing dialog will appear 2 Enter the new na
132. cer or an external MIDI controller For details please see below Selecting a program using Program Select and the VALUE controllers 1 Press the PROG button The LED will light up Refer to the illustration below for the buttons Alternatively you can use the mode button see Selecting modes on page 9 The KROME will enter Program mode 2 Access the Prog P0 Play Main page This is shown in the top line of the display Mode button Tab name kon NT Page number and name Bank Category J 120 00 number Bank A gt Keyboard Category Select popup button Category number and name Beco KROME Grand Piano Program Select Program number and name Program Select popup button If a different page is shown press the EXIT button a few times to return to the Prog P0 Play Main page 3 Make sure that Program Select is selected If it s not selected press Program Select in the display or press the EXIT button to highlight the indication 4 Select the program you want to play You can use the following methods to select a program e Use the INC or DEC buttons e Turn the VALUE dial e Use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the program number and press the ENTER button 5 Press one of the PROG BANK A F buttons to select a bank When you select a different Bank the button s LED will light up and the selected bank will appear on the left side of the di
133. city Step Sort _ Latch m Key Sync m Keyboard Swing 000 in ARP Scan DrumTrk DrumTrk Setup Zone Pattern Prog Changing the duration of the arpeggiated notes The P7 ARP DT ARP Setup Gate parameter specifies the duration of the arpeggiated notes With a setting of 000 100 the duration will always be the specified gate time Step is available if you ve selected UO0000 INT U1027 USER as the Pattern the gate value specified for each step will be used You can also control this by using the arpeggio control ARP GATE knob see page 86 Specifying the arpeggio pattern s velocity and other settings In P7 ARP DT ARP Setup the Velocity parameter specifies the velocity of the arpeggiated notes If you choose a value in the range of 001 127 that velocity value will always be used If you choose Key the velocity value of how you played the key will be used Step is available if Pattern is set to U0000 INT U1027 USER this causes the velocity value specified for each step to be used Swing offsets the timing of arpeggiated notes that are even numbered counting from the beginning Velocity and Swing can be controlled by knobs 2 and 3 respectively when SELECT is set to ARP Specifying the zone where the arpeggiator will function In P7 ARP DT ARP Scan Zone you can specify the range of notes keys and velocities where the arpeggiator will function PROG
134. city Velocity Curve 014 curve settings Effect Global SW EEE 8 ARP Drum Track Effect bypass 2 settings Enable m IFX1 5 C All ARP DT Off m MFX1 amp 2 Load ARP when changing Link the m TFX m Program arpeggiator m Combination Stop the z arpeggiator Basic E and drum A track Tuning and Transposing Tuning to another instrument To adjust the tuning in fine increments in order to match other instruments or recorded music 1 In Global mode go to P0 Basic Setup Basic page 2 Adjust the Master Tune to the desired pitch The Master Tune is adjustable over a range of 50 cents one semitone 100 cents When Master Tune is at 0 middle A is tuned to 440 Hz Transposing the keyboard You can also transpose the keyboard in semitones for quick key changes for instance if the band decides to play a song in F rather than E To do so 1 In Global mode go to P0 Basic Setup Basic page 2 Adjust the Key Transpose as desired amp Three types of data are handled in Global mode user drum kit settings Global P5 user arpeggio patterns Global P6 and other global settings Global P0 4 Each of these has a respective memory area to store its data This data can also be saved to various types of SD card in Media mode For details please see Writing Global settings User Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns on page 116 and Saving to SD card Media Save on page 118
135. correct date e The KROME does not contain an internal calendar Use the menu command Set Date Time Media Utility page to specify the current time and date before you save the data gt p 123 Connections with a computer The KROME does not respond to MIDI data sent from outside Is the USB cable connected correctly gt p 20 The computer does not detect the KROME Are the USB cables connected correctly An error occurs when you disconnect from the computer Never disconnect the KROME from the computer while your host application is in use While connected you are asked to install software or a device driver Does the operating system or version of your computer support the KROME When using USB sound processing is slow or the tempo is unstable Is the KORG USB MIDI driver installed correctly e You must install the dedicated Korg driver in order to use the KROME via USB MIDI If your computer s operating system is Windows you ll need to install the driver for each USB port where you connect the KROME If you connect the KROME to a different USB port than the one you used when installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver for Windows you ll need to rein stall the KORG USB MIDI driver 129 130 Appendices Error messages Error and confirmation messages A Are you sure Meaning This message asks you to confirm execution To execute press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button
136. cting Combinations as well Note With the Program Up Down method you won t be able to select programs while the Bank Program Select or Category Program Select menus are open Use the Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc Dec method described below Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc Dec This lets you use the Assignable Foot Switch to duplicate the functions of the front panel INC or DEC buttons This method is convenient if you want to open the Bank Program Select menu or the Category Program Select menu and switch programs while viewing the program or combination menu 1 Follow steps 1 2 under Assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down above At the top of the page set the Foot Switch Assign parameter to Value Inc or Value Dec Now the foot switch will act just like you re pressing the front panel INC or DEC buttons Note The foot switch will work like this for the entire KROME not just when the Bank Program select menu or Category Program Select menu is open Connecting a foot pedal If you connect an optional EXP 2 foot controller or XVP 10 expression volume pedal to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack you can use it to apply modulation to sounds or effects or to adjust the overall volume This pedal will always function in the same way regardless of the Program Combination or Song you ve selected You can assign the function in the Global mode Like the Assignable Foot Switch descri
137. cting modes and pages Selecting modes In order to use a particular function on the KROME you must first select the appropriate mode e Press one of the front panel mode buttons to enter the corresponding mode COMBI button Combination mode PROG button Program mode SEQ button Sequencer mode GLOBAL button Global mode MEDIA button Media mode e Alternatively you can press the Mode button located in the upper left of the display and select the desired mode from a menu see page 4 For a summary of each mode please see About the KROME s modes on page 7 Note The selected mode is shown in the upper left of the display and also indicated by the lit status of one of the above mode buttons Note By pressing the GLOBAL or MEDIA button twice you can select the previously selected mode Combination Program or Sequencer Selecting page group and tabs Each mode has a large number of parameters which are grouped into pages These pages are further subdivided by tabs with up to twelve tabs per page e Make sure that the desired mode is selected For this explanation we ll use Combination mode as an example Selecting a page group Moving by selecting a page group The Page Select screen shows a list of the page groups within each mode Select the desired page group from this list 1 Press the PAGE button Alternatively you can access the mode menu and press the mode button and then press the
138. ction only for notes B3 and lower e Arpeggiator A is also assigned to timbre 16 but this is so that the timbre 2 program will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Notice the timbre settings for timbre 2 and 16 Timbre Status MIDIChannel Assign e Ifthe arpeggiator is off playing the keyboard will sound the timbre s that are set to Gch or to the global MIDI channel in this case 01 Since the MIDI Channel of timbre 2 is set to 02 it will not sound Timbre 16 is set to Gch but since Status is Off it will not sound Using the arpeggiator while you play Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations e Notes from any MIDI channel that is assigned to a timbre will trigger the arpeggiator In this case these will be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch global MIDI channel When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A which is assigned to timbre 16 Gch Timbre 2 will be sounded by arpeggiator A Since the Status of timbre 16 is Off it will not sound e Since the Status of timbre 16 is Off it will not sound regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off It is a dummy timbre that causes timbre 2 to sound only when the arpeggiator is on Combination A005 Boom Pow Pad Category Synth Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI Basic MIDI Channel is set to 01 Select combination A005 Boom Pow Pad turn the ARP button on and play e Arpeggiato
139. d into exclusive events 4 If you go to the page e g P8 Routing IFX that shows the parameters you adjusted in realtime you can watch the recorded changes be reproduced while the song plays back Exclusive messages that will be recorded dur ing realtime recording The following exclusive messages will be recorded See page 191 of the Parameter Guide e Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device e Parameter changes in Sequencer mode e Master Volume universal system exclusive messages assigned to a foot pedal or knob Using realtime controls to record changes in a MIDI track s pan EQ volume and tone adjust By controlling the pan EQ volume and tone adjust parameters during realtime recording you can record these changes so that they will be reflected during playback Use multi track recording if you want to modify the settings of multiple tracks simultaneously Note Controlling these parameters will transmit control change or system exclusive messages In order for this data to be recorded the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive settings must be checked Go to Global mode and verify that these items are checked Note Use Param MIDI Out in Global P1 MIDI Basic page to specify whether control change messages or system exclusive messages will be transmitted when you edit the Pan CC 10 Volume CC 7 or Send 1 2 level CC 93 and CC 91 parameters I
140. d MIDI track and range of measures Modify Velocity This command modifies the velocity values of notes in the specified area so that they will change over time according to a selected curve Create Exclusive Data This command creates universal system exclusive messages or KROME parameter change messages in the specified region of a MIDI track Erase Exclusive Data This command erases deletes universal system exclusive messages or KROME parameter change messages from the specified region To delete all types of system exclusive message other than those listed above set the Erase Measure command s Kind field to Exclusive and execute the command 67 68 Creating songs Sequencer mode Pattern Step Recording Loop Type Here you can perform step recording into a pattern Event Edit Here you can edit individual events of the musical data in a pattern Piano Roll You can edit notes velocities and control changes in the piano roll screen Pattern Parameter This command specifies the number of measures and the time signature of the selected pattern Erase Pattern This command erases the data from the selected pattern Copy Pattern This command copies the settings and musical data of the selected pattern to another pattern Bounce Pattern This command combines the musical data of the bounce source pattern and bounce destination pattern and places the combined musical data in the bounce desti
141. d Total effect These settings can be adjusted in the same way as on page 80 M You can control these effects via MIDI on the Ctrl Ch The specified MIDI channel will control dynamic modulation Dmod for the Master and Total Effect 81 82 Using Effects Dynamic modulation Common FX LFO Dynamic modulation Dmod Dynamic modulation Dmod lets you use MIDI messages or the KROME s controllers to modulate specific effect parameters in real time Dynamic modulation to control an effect pa rameter in realtime As an example let s set up dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime 1 As described in the procedure for Program Effects settings on page 79 set IFX1 to 078 L C R BPM Delay Verify that you re hearing a delay effect 2 Access the Prog P8 Routing IFX IFX1 page Now we can set the Dmod to change the delay level via the Joystick 3 Set Input Level D mod to 100 4 Set Source to JS Y 01 The delay sound will disappear The input level to the effect can be controlled by the joystick As you move the joystick away from yourself the delay sound will gradually increase PROG Waliau TALS Esi v L C R BPM Delay EW A E BPM MIDI Time Over L Delay Base Note f Times x3 Level 20 C Delay Base Note J Times x1 Level 20 R Delay Base Note gt Times x1 Level 20 Feedback C Delay 10 Sre gt Off Amt
142. d category on the display Off 127 127 off 127 127 off 127 127 You can use the Copy Insert Effect menu command to copy effect settings from another program etc Also you can use Swap Insert Effect to exchange for example IFX1 and IFX5 7 Press the On Off button to turn on the insert effect Each time you press this button the insert effect will toggle on off When Off the result will be the same as when 000 No Effect is selected the sound will be output without being processed by the insert effect 8 Make Chain settings If the Chain check box is checked the insert effect will be connected in series Since the output of the oscillator is being sent to IFX1 in step 2 adjusting settings as shown in the diagram above step 6 would connect all five insertion effects IFX1 IFX2 gt IFX3 in series so that these effects would be inserted into the output of the oscillator 9 Adjust settings for Pan 8 Bus Bus Select Send 1 Send 2 and FX Ctrl for the sound after it has passed through the insert effects If you ve specified a chain the settings that follow the last IFX in the chain will be valid except for FX Ctrl Pan 8 Sets the pan of the IFX output Bus Bus Select Specifies the output destination Normally you will set this to L R Send 1 Send 2 Sets the send levels to the master effects For this example set this to 127 FX Control Bus The FX Control Buses lets you create
143. d directly around the cutoff frequency Try modulating the cutoff with an LFO to create phaser like effects Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency l l l l Low Pass z 12 l 24 24 100 ik 18k 24k High Pass 24 l 24 100 ik 18k 2dk Band Pass o 12 24 24 160 tk 16k 24k l 12 Band Reject 8 12 24 24 100 1 1k 24k l Cutoff Frequency Detailed Editing with Programs Using Filters Resonance Resonance emphasizes the frequencies around the cutoff frequency as shown in the diagram below When this is set to 0 there is no emphasis and frequencies beyond the cutoff will simply diminish smoothly At medium settings the resonance will alter the timbre of the filter making it sound more nasal or more extreme At very high settings the resonance can be heard as a separate whistling pitch To make the resonance track the keyboard pitch please see Key Follow on page 29 of the Parameter Guide Modulating the filters You can modulate the filter cutoff frequency using the Filter EG the LFOs keyboard tracking and other built in and MIDI controllers This is a great way to add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound Filter EG The Filter EG is a multi stage envelope which you can use to modulate the filter as well as other Program parameters The EG itself is set up on the EG tab the
144. dal to the KROME you ll be able to control the KROME using your feet O DAMPER SWITCH PEDAL ASSIGNABLE Connecting a damper pedal When you press the damper pedal the notes you ve pressed will be sustained so that they will continue even after you take your hands off the keyboard This is also called a sustain pedal it has the same function as the damper pedal of an acoustic piano If the optional Korg DS 1H damper is connected you ll be able to take advantage of the half damper effect where the depth that you press the pedal will vary the damper amount If any other type of pedal is connected it will function as a damper switch In Combination or Sequencer mode you can also select settings so that the damper will apply to some sounds but not to other sounds 1 Connect a Korg DS 1H damper pedal to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL SW1 DAMPER jack 2 Depending on which assignable jack you have connected the pedal to set the controller type Type to Damper and set the Polarity as appropriate see page 202 of the Parameter Guide Note The half damper sensitivity is adjusted to a standard value when the KROME is shipped from the factory If the half damper pedal you re using does not respond appropriately please adjust the sensitivity see page 217 of the Parameter Guide Connecting a foot switch This lets you use a simple foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 or PS 3 as an assignable controller The foot swi
145. data will be loaded Append will load the song into the song number that follows the song s currently existing in internal memory without leaving a vacant number Clear will erase all songs from internal memory and load the songs into the numbers from which they were saved 121 122 Loading amp saving data 4 Press the OK button to execute loading amp Never remove the media while data is being loaded Loading KROME system update data You can update the KROME s system by downloading the most recent version of the system file from the Korg website http www korg com to your computer and loading it into the KROME For details on the procedure please see the Korg website and to Update System Software on page 218 of the Parameter Guide Use the Global mode menu command Update System Software to load the system update data Media utility Formatting media Media utility Formatting media Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device cannot be used as is you must format the media before you can use it with the KROME amp When you format media all data that had been saved on that media will be erased Be sure to double check media for data before you format amp After formatting it is not possible to press the COMPARE button to return to the previous state 1 Make sure that the media you want to format is inserted For details please see Inse
146. double drum kit Here you can specify the program type Broadly speaking the program type will be either a program that uses a multisample or a program that uses a drum kit see Multisamples and Drum Kits on page 33 This choice is made by the Prog P1 Basic Controllers Program Basic Oscillator Mode setting which specifies which type the oscillators will use Up to two can be used simultaneously for each type e Multisample Single Double e Drum kit Drums Double Drums ect v G PROG eres erate LE S Oscillator Mode Single Double Drums Double Drums OSC Picture 1 01 Acoustic Piano Ss 2 gt 02 Piano Damper E Voice Assign Mode Poly C Poly Legato Mono __ Single Trigger er 9 Gt Single single program uses one oscillator and Double double program uses two oscillators Drums drum program is similar to a single program but uses a drum kit created in Global mode instead of a multisample Double Drums double drum program uses two drum kits By using an ambience type kit as the second drum kit you can give a wider sense of space to the sound Polyphony Polyphony is the number of notes that can be played simultaneously such as in a chord The polyphony depends on the program type Program type Polyphony Double Double Drums Note e Double Programs and Double Drums use twice as many voices as Single Programs e S
147. e Pan PROG SAN yes 48 Amp1 Driver1 RN iG S Driver _ Bypass Drive 217 LowBoost 00 AMS Off AMS Off Intensity 00 Intensity 00 Amp Level Amp Level Pan Pan Ca64 AMS Note Number Intensity 00 CAES ee ee ee Pan The main Pan parameter controls the stereo position after the signal has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Normally you ll set this to C064 so that the sound is centered equally between the left and right speakers To create a stereo effect when Oscillator Mode is set to Double set the Amp1 Driver 1 page Pan to L001 and the Amp2 Driver2 page Pan R127 This will make OSC1 go to the left speaker and OSC2 go to the right speaker With a setting of Random the pan will change randomly each time you play a note on KROME producing an interesting effect Pan Use DKit Setting Use DKit Setting applies when Oscillator Mode is set to Drums or Double Drums If this is checked the Program can use a different pan position for each drum sound as specified by the Drum Kit If this is unchecked all drum sounds will use the Program s pan position The factory presets and GM drum kits use individual pan positions for the different drums so normally it s best to leave this checked Amp modulation PROG RVI Keyboard Track Amp1 Modulation ee ee Lt ce Ci c2 cs C4 cs c c7 cs cs Key Key Low gv Center C4 Key High C6 Ramp BtmLo 00 LoCent 00 Ce
148. e 22 or the Bank Program Select menu see page 22 10 VALUE controllers Use these controllers to edit the parameter that s selected in the display INC and DEC buttons VALUE dial 0 9 and ENTER buttons Together these controls specify and confirm the value of the selected parameter See page 10 COMPARE button Compares your current edited sound to the sound before it was edited For more details please see Compare function on page 11 11 PAGE SELECT EXIT PAGE button When you press this button a list of the pages within the selected mode will appear in the display Press the button of the desired page See page 9 EXIT button Press this button to return to the main page of the current mode See page 9 12 Save Write WRITE button Use this button to save programs combinations global settings drum kits or arpeggio patterns to internal memory see page 9 You ll also use this button to save songs to media see page 75 When you press this button in the appropriate mode or page a Write dialog box will appear Press the button once again to save the data 13 Sequencer The buttons in this section are used for operations in Sequencer mode such as recording and playback see page 54 The REC button is also used to save a program or combination or when using the Auto Song Setup function see page 59 PAUSE II button REW lt lt button FF gt gt button LOC
149. e IFX number e If you want to execute the Swap procedure on a double size effect specify an IFX number to which a double size effect is assigned T The internal memory has been corrupted likely due to an interruption of power while the system was writing saving data This has been repaired and the affected Bank has been initialized OK Meaning A memory write procedure did not end normally perhaps because the power was turned off while processing was still underway after you wrote a program or other data into internal memory e The KROME will automatically initialize itself in order to repair the internal memory This message will appear at this time press OK to close the dialog box In some cases the preload bank data may be temporarily initialized As necessary use the Global mode Load Preload Demo Data command to load the preload data into internal memory or if you have your own backup PCG load it using Media mode There is not readable data Meaning Either the file size is 0 or the file does not contain data that can be accessed by the load or open procedure Alternatively the data is damaged etc and cannot be loaded or accessed This file is already loaded Meaning When loading a divided PCG file you attempted to load a file that had already been loaded e Load the PCG files that have not yet been loaded Error messages Error and confirmation messages U Unable to create directory Meaning You
150. e OSC2 drum kit of a double drums program press the Jump to Drum Kit Edit button from the P2 OSC Pitch OSC2 Setup page VIG Transpose 80 Tune 00 Freq Offset 0 0 Hz N PROG mg OSC1 Octave 8 8 S DrumKit1 2102C INT Basic Kit 1 P2 0SC Pitch OSC1 Setup Jump to DrumKit Edit f f You ll jump to the Global mode P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup page Note If you enter Global mode by pressing the GLOBAL button or the mode button and then access the P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup page the OSC1 sound settings will be used KEY Assign Drum Kit ES T e Select HE ILLALLA ILLALLA ICAIC 1 Ad AILAAALAALLAILAILAA ALAALA m Assign Velocity Split Drumsample Reverse StartOffset Level R EF Mono Offset Off Level 40 lI E 8404 Tom 3 Lo on g4a4 Tom 3 Lo 1st 52 ofr off ofr 5S off 7 off H off _ Sample Sample Driver Velocity Voice ReturntoOSC setup Param EQ Split a nf a 7 3 In the top line of the display use Drum Kit Select to select the drum kit that you want to edit amp GM drum kits 48 GM 56 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 48 GM 56 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit to copy it to 00 INT 47 USER and then edit the copy 4 Use the Key parameter
151. e Song on page 164 of the Parameter Guide Using template songs Loading a template song is an easy way to create settings appropriate for a particular musical style You can also assign a drum pattern to a track at the same time 1 In the P0 Play REC page press the menu button and choose Load Template Song A dialog box will appear From KLAR m Copy Pattern to Track too Cancel OK 2 In the From field choose the template song you want to load 3 If you check Copy Pattern to Track too a dialog box for copying a pattern will automatically appear after you execute the Load Template Song operation If you execute the command without checking this only the template song you selected in step 2 will be loaded 4 Press the OK button to load the template song or press the Cancel button if you decide to cancel When you perform this operation song settings other than track Loop and RPPR will be copied If you executed this operation with Copy Pattern to Track too checked in step 3 the Copy Pattern To Track dialog box will appear Copy Pattern to Track Pattern Preset Re Ballad 1 A1 To Track 1 Exit OK Measure 001 This dialog box is the same as the one that appears for the Copy To Track P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit menu command 5 In the Pattern field select the pattern that you want to copy In the To Track fie
152. e Step Each user arpeggio pattern has up to 48 steps Starting with the first step the arpeggiator will play notes at intervals of the note value specified by Resolution The vertical lines of the grid indicate the steps Use Step to select the step then specify Pitch Off set Gate Velocity and Flam for each step You can also select the step by pressing the Step line in the parameter view at the bottom You can also edit by dragging in the parameter view Press the button to the left of the parameter view to switch between Pitch Pitch Offset gt Gate Gate gt Vel Velocity gt Flam Flam e Tone Each step can sound a chord of up to 12 tones Tone No 00 11 By touching and dragging the overview on the right part of the screen or by using the zoom scroll buttons above it select the location for entering tones in the zoom view below Press the touch grid to enter tones When Step is selected you can also enter tones by using the numeric keys 0 9 and the and but tons Note The Tone No corresponds to the numeric keys 0 9 and the and buttons as shown below Each time you press a numeric key 0 9 or a or button the corresponding tone will turn on or off The horizontal lines of the grid in the center of the display correspond to tones Tone00 09 0 9 buttons Tone10 button 7 3 J i7 07 06 Tone11 button o5 04 03 02 01 o0 Tone No
153. e a number of other program parameters via AMS note on Attack Level note off Y y Break Level Level Release Level Rel Ti L Decay Time epee Attack Time Slope Time Sutart Level Note The parameters that can be modulated by an EG and the range of values will differ depending on the EGs provided for each section 35 36 Playing and editing Programs Diverse modulation settings AMS and AMS mixer Using AMS AMS Alternate Modulation Source lets you modulate program parameters using controllers EG or LFO as the modulation source Extremely creative types of modulation are possible for example you can use a single controller to simultaneously modulate multiple parameters or you can use an EG to modulate an LFO s frequency and then use that LFO to modulate a filter AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the assignable modulation sources in KROME including e Controllers of the KROME itself such as the joystick SW 1 2 and the realtime knobs e Incoming MIDI controllers e Modulators such as the Filter Pitch and Amp EGs the LFOs or the AMS Mixers Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed depth amount etc of how AMS will control the modulation A number of frequently used modulation routings such as using the joystick to vary the pitch are provided as additional dedicated routings separate from AMS Note that not all AMS sources may be availabl
154. e for some modulation destinations For details on alternate modulation and AMS please see below e Alternate Modulation Sources AMS on page 339 of the Parameter Guide e Creating Vibrato on page 37 e Pitch EG on page 37 e Filter EG on page 39 e LFO modulation on page 39 e AMS Pan on page 36 of the Parameter Guide e LFO1 2 on page 40 Using the AMS Mixers The AMS Mixers combine two AMS sources into one or process an AMS source to make it into something new For example this lets you use an LFO to modulate a filter s resonance while also modulating it by an EG Although resonance has only one AMS input using the AMS mixer makes this possible You could also do things such as using the filter EG to control the amount of LFO1 The wide variety of other possibilities include using the joystick to control the amount of pitch EG allowing the joystick to apply bend only to notes played while you hold down the foot switch or changing the response of a realtime controller The AMS Mixer outputs appear in the list of AMS sources just like the LFOs and EGs An AMS mixer s output signal can be used to modulate a variety of parameters This also means that the original unmodified inputs to the AMS Mixers are still available as well For instance if you use LFO 1 as an input to an AMS Mixer you can use the processed version of the LFO to control one AMS destination and the ori
155. e this data to low capacity media you may need more than one media 1 Prepare the media on which you want to save the data 2 Press the MEDIA button to enter Media mode 3 Access the Media Save page Press the Save tab 4 If the media contains directories select the directory in which you want to save the data Press the Open button to move to a lower level or press the Up button to move to an upper level Note If you are saving data on high capacity media we recommend that you create directories to organize the media into sections To create a new directory move to the level at which you want to create the directory and execute the Utility menu command Create Directory 5 Press the menu button to access the menu and press Save All A dialog box will appear The contents settings and operations for the dialog box will depend on the type of data that you are saving Save All PCG and SEQ To T NEWFILE PCG SNG Combination Program Selection Selection Drum Kit Arp Pattern Selection Selection INT USR INT USR m m m ABCDEF ABCD CoCo mm mm m m m Global Setting Cancel 6 Press the text edit button and input a filename for the file you want to save See page 117 7 Press each Selection button to access the dialog box and use the check boxes to uncheck any items that you do not need to save Select Save Items Program Bank m gt m w m o
156. ect or total effect into the desired location of a track so that these settings will automatically switch during playback MIDI GM XG and GS exclusive messages can be recorded on a track but the KROME s tone generator will not respond to these messages Recording internal parameter changes You can use SysEx for automation of internal KROME effects and Program parameters Here we ll explain how to record internal parameter changes As an example we ll explain how parameter changes recorded on a different track can be used to modify the parameters of the insert effect IFX1 applied to the program of track 1 Note In order to record system exclusive messages make sure that the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing setting Enable Exclusive is checked Go to Global mode and verify that this is checked GLOBAL REMI MIDI Routing VY JG MIDI Routing A ARP Controllers MIDI Out O Control Change SysEx Param Chang DF ih ee m Enable Program Change m Enable After Touch m Bank Change m Enable Control Change m Combination Change Enable Exclusive MIDI MIDI Basic Routing 1 Select the desired program for MIDI track 1 and route it to IFX1 Then record a phrase of about sixteen measures e Inthe P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page use Program Select to select the desired program for MIDI Track 01 e Inthe P8 Routing IFX Routing T01 08 page route the MIDI Track 01 Bus IFX Output Select to IFX1 Then i
157. ed amp Before you load the preload data go to the Global mode P0 Basic Setup System Preferences page and uncheck the Memory Protect settings for the data that you want to load If you execute this procedure with these settings checked the data will not be loaded amp Loading the preloaded data will overwrite the contents of the internal memory If you want to keep the existing data that is stored in internal memory use Save All PCG amp SNG or Save PCG to save your data to external media before you continue 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Basic page Enter Global mode by pressing the GLOBAL button or by using the mode button If the Global PO Basic Setup Basic page is not shown press the EXIT button 2 Press the menu button and choose Load Preload Demo Data A dialog box will appear Load Preload Demo Data Kind EGA Reece EEA ES Cancel OK 3 In the Kind field select All Preload PCG and Demo Songs 4 Press the OK button to load the preload data If you decide not to load the preload data press the Cancel button When you press the OK button a dialog box will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button to execute loading Note When the dialog box is displayed the ENTER button performs the same function as the OK button About the data loaded by All Preload PCG and Demo Songs When you execute All Preload PCG the following data will be
158. ed for the song that s currently playing will play Converting a cue list to a song The Convert to Song menu command lets you convert a cue list to a single song For details please see Convert to Song Convert Cue List to Song on page 189 of the Parameter Guide Saving your song Converting a cue list to a song Saving your song In order to ensure that the data you create is reproduced faithfully we recommend that you save your data by using Save All so that the programs will also be saved However if you have not changed the program numbers or sounds used in your song saving only the song related data SNG will minimize the size of the data amp When you turn off the power the Sequencer mode settings the recorded songs and the user pattern data will be lost 1 Insert an SD card in the SD card slot With the card label facing upward insert the connector end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until you hear a click amp Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when you insert it Forcing it in the wrong direction may damage the slot or the card and the data may be lost 2 Press the WRITE button The Save Songs and Cue Lists Data dialog box will appear If you want to change the name adjust the appropriate settings see page 117 3 Press the WRITE button once again to save write the data If data of the same name already exists as message will ask whether you want
159. ent of slider 2 in the display Slider 2 is assigned to OSC1 Filter LFO1 Int A OSC1 filter LFO1 intensity It will adjust the amount of filter modulation produced by LFO1 7 Lower slider 2 slightly so that the display indicates about 6 8 Play a few more notes The filter modulation has added some shimmer to the sound Now maybe it could use a bit more edge 9 Look at the assignments for switches 6 and 7 in the display These are programmed to raise the Filter Cutoff and Filter Resonance respectively Switches are just on off but you can set a specific value for the On position notice the 10 and 40 in the switch s value boxes 10 Press each of the two switch buttons The sound now has a more interesting character due to the filters Since it s brighter we ve also restored some of the electric piano character Pretty easy huh Note depending on the parameter you may occasionally hear glitches in the sound as you move the control 29 30 Playing and editing Programs Changing parameter assignments The factory Programs include default assignments of Tone Adjust parameters to the sliders and buttons in the display If you like you can change any of the assignments To do so 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Tone Adjust page 2 Press the popup button located to the left of the assigned parameter A popup window will appear with a long menu of parameters You can tell various things a
160. ent programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard NAAM a eee Program A Soft dynamics ITT a different programs On the KROME you can use a different Program for each of up to sixteen Timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more complex setups suong Keboad playing Soft dynamics Example B and C D are split In the lower keyboard range A and B are layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A Program B As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume diminishes gradually This lets you change a split into a keyboard crossfade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Keyboard X Fade keyboard As you play from low notes to high notes the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in Detailed Editing with Combinations Layers Splits and Velocity Switches Creating Key Splits and Layers Splits and Layers Let s create a Combination that combines both splits and layers like the diagram below Wi Timbre 3 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page AU AUT C1 B3 C4 9 2 Select a piano sound for Timbre 1 a brass sound for Timbre 2 and a strings sound for Timbre 3 3 Access the P3 Timbre Parameters MIDI T01 08 page 4 For Timbres 1 3 set Status to INT and MIDI Channel to Gch the Global Channel
161. er in milliseconds ms or in rhythmic values which sync to the system tempo If you set the Delay to Key Off the Timbre will sound when the note is released COMBI EFATE Delay 181 88 V IO AOOO Piano amp Strings J 120 06 T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard l ms Delay Time 8808 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MIDI Tempo Sync E O O O Q Q D O Editing Programs with Tone Adjust Using Tone Adjust you can create detailed edits to Programs within the context of the Combination These edits will not affect the original Program or any other Combinations which use the Program To edit a Program with Tone Adjust Select a timbre in the Timbre field of the PO Play Tone Adjust page Then select the parameter that you want to adjust and use the VALUE controllers to edit the sound COMBI UR METY Tone Adjust V iG A gt 000 Piano amp Strings J 120 00 Timbre 1 A Q KROME Grand Piano m Auto Load BJJ 0Sc1 05 Rel 00 1 a 5 rd f 1 2 1 2 1 MS Fitr Fitr Fltr Trsp Trsp Tune Tune DK Oo Fe Reso EG Tm mW EUW EW EW Ew Ew A 05 00 0000 0000 PROG 00 00 00 Pitch gy 1 F 1 A 1 Fit Fit Fit Fit sire Oifoia Oro Div Oca Oecd Oecs OEGR 00 00 o0 00 00 00 Arpeggiator settings According to the note data received fro
162. er will automatically begin recording when it receives the MIDI Start message transmitted by your external sequencer 9 When playback has ended stop your external sequencer The KROME s sequencer will automatically stop recording when it receives the MIDI Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer You can also stop recording by pressing the START STOP gt W button on the KROME After this you can play back the newly recorded sequence 10 In the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page set MIDI Clock to Internal Set Tempo Mode to Auto in the Seq P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page Press the START STOP gt W button to play back Note If the correct sounds are not selected when you start playing back you may be able to solve the problem by using the menu command Event Edit P6 Track Edit to re specify the Program Change data 64 Creating songs Sequencer mode Recording System Exclusive events Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device or the parameter changes produced when you edit a track parameter or effect parameter can be recorded in real time on any track During playback the exclusive messages you recorded will control the track parameters and effect parameters of the song and can be sent to external MIDI devices Note You can use the menu command Put Effect Setting to Track to insert an exclusive event containing the parameter settings for an insert effect master eff
163. erates relative to the filter cutoff frequency both knobs 1 and 3 will control the tonal change produced by the filter Level Time Knob 4 RELEASE This adjusts the filter and amp EG release time changing the time from note off until the sound is no longer heard Turning the knob will change the release time of the filter EG and the amp EG Normally turning the knob toward the left will shorten the release time and turning the knob toward the right will lengthen it note on Attack Level note off Y Break Level y Level Release Level Sustain Level Time Release time Decay Time Slope Time Attack Time Sutart Level Example 1 Select program Category KEYBOARD A066 Dark R amp B Piano This is an electric piano sound Let s try modifying the sound a little 2 Press the REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT button to select TONE the LED will light up 3 While you play slowly turn knob 1 filter frequency about 3 4 toward the right The piano sound will become more like a synth sweep 4 Next turn knob 2 filter resonance about 3 4 toward the right as well 5 Leave knob 2 in its position and try turning knob 1 to the left and right Raising the resonance will change the sound as though you were playing through a wah pedal USER controls In the USER section you can turn knobs 1 4 to control various aspects of the sound such as volume portamento time pan filter and amp EG
164. ere s how you can record an RPPR performance and a keyboard performance at the same time Before you continue use the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page to assign a drum program to MIDI track 1 and a bass program to MIDI track 2 1 Assign several keys starting with C 2 to preset patterns Check the C 2 Assign setting and set Pattern Bank to Preset and Pattern Select to the desired preset pattern For Track select MIDI track 1 Track 01 to which you assigned a drum program 2 For each RPPR pattern set Sync to SEQ With a setting of SEQ RPPR patterns triggered while the sequencer is playing or recording will start in synchronization with the measures of the sequencer See page 158 of the Parameter Guide ery vV G J 120 00 P16 Pattern RPPR S000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 E091 Basic Kit S RPPR Setup KEY D im Assign Mode Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync SEQ Pattern Preset P 3 Pop amp Ballad 3 All Track Track 1 MIDI TRACK 1 Shift 00 Revert to last assigned T 1 E 91 Basic Kit1 GOES 3 Access the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page 4 Check the RPPR check box and set Track Select to MIDI Track 02 If the RPPR check box is selected the RPPR function will be turned on even in pages and tabs other than RPPR Setup allowing you to perform with the RPPR function by pressing a key to which an RPPR is assigned Note In the note range
165. ern 2 Press the ARP button to turn the arpeggiator on the button will light up Even if you entered Global mode from a program in which the arpeggiator was turned off you can use the ARP button to turn it on 3 Select the Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page see page 211 of the Parameter Guide GLOBAL AAH e Tee LA Arpeggiator Select A OB J 120 00 Length 8 M al Octave m Sort m Key Sync Resolution 5 Latch _ Keyboard S Arpeggio Pattern Setup Arpeggio Tone Mode Normal Fixed Note Arpeggio Type As Played Octave Motion Up 91 92 Arpeggiator function 4 Arpeggiator Select will automatically be set to A when you navigate to this page from Program mode 5 In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit For this example select an empty user arpeggio pattern G amp If a blank pattern is selected playing the keyboard will not start an arpeggio Although preset arpeggio patterns P0 P4 can be selected they cannot be edited amp When you edit a user arpeggio pattern the changes will have an effect anytime that this pattern is used in Program Combination or Song 6 In Length specify the length of the pattern After the pattern has played for the length specified it will return to the beginning This setting can also be changed during or after editing For this example set it to 08 amp Set k
166. ern recording will begin Play the keyboard and use the joystick and other controllers to record your performance When you reach the end of the pattern the sequencer will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue recording If you continue recording the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data 9 If you want to delete specific data while you continue pattern recording you can press the REC button or check the Remove Data check box For details refer to step 6 of Loop All Tracks on page 60 10 Press the START STOP gt W button to stop recording If you made a mistake or decide to re record press the START STOP gt HJ button to stop recording and press the COMPARE button Then begin the pattern recording procedure again as in step 8 Other way to record Using the Drum Track function and the arpeggiator to record on multiple tracks simultaneously You can use multi recording to simultaneously record a multi track performance using the Drum Track function and arpeggiator For details please see Recording MIDI in real time on page 60 Using the RPPR function to record on multiple tracks simultaneously You can use multi recording to simultaneously record a multi track performance using the RPPR function For details please see Creating an RPPR pattern on page 71 Song editing Song Song editing You can apply a variety of edi
167. ers page will appear Press the MIDI 1 8 tab or the MIDI 9 16 tab to access the MIDI T01 08 page MIDI T09 16 page SEQ MERCA EAE HELSE 1 HHE Meter 4 4 S000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 MIDI T61 88 J 120 00 Manual Resolution Hi RPPR T01 pakk KROME Grand Piano Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign 2 E i E S B 7 Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Status BTH BIH BTH BTH EBIH BTH BTH OBTH MIDI Channel Rim 2 83 04 05 86 07 o8 Bank Select When Status EX2 e Use Status to specify whether each track will play the internal and or external sound generator Normally when using the KROME you will select INT or BTH INT During playback the KROME s internal tone generator will play the MIDI data recorded on that track When you use the KROME s keyboard or 57 58 Creating songs Sequencer mode controllers you will be playing and controlling the track selected by Track Select EXT EX2 BTH During playback the MIDI data recorded on that track will be transmitted from MIDI OUT to play an external sound module When you use the KROME s keyboard or controllers MIDI data will be transmitted to play and control the external sound module selected by Track Select The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI Channel of KROME tracks that are set to EXT EX2 or BTH If Status is set to BTH both the
168. et that appears in the corner of the display Note If you are unable to select commands from the menu do the following 1 Press the GLOBAL button lit 2 Press the EXIT button several times 3 Hold down the ENTER button and press 4 on the numeric keypad The Touch Panel Calibration page will appear Follow the on screen instructions to re calibrate the touch panel Can t switch modes or pages If you re doing any of the following you may not be able to change modes or switch to a different page e Recording or playing back a song or pattern Alternatively could the KROME be in the paused PAUSE IB or record ready condition Could something be pressing the TouchView display Could a realtime control popup or similar message be displayed e Disabling Animation Value Edit Pop up REALTIME CONTROLS Pop up Global PO Basic Setup System Preferences will improve the response time and performance In Combination or Sequencer modes you can t edit the value of Timbre Track parame ters such as MIDI Channel or Status Some parameters can t be edited while notes are playing either locally or from MIDI If the damper pedal is held down or if its calibration is incorrect notes may be sustaining even if they aren t audible e Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that does not match the Damper Polarity setting Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers gt p 18 e n some cases t
169. eter Tempo Mode Location g 0 ES oron Vo 1T oe MRA Meter 4 4 J 126 00 15 E5000 NEW SONG H 5 Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 Resolution Hi RPPR me ee Song Select E Popup Track Select T01 Bacall wit Grand iano Category gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 Category Keyboard J Keyboard Mi Ke Sad oard Keyboard J Keyboard Keyboard IIkey Ke oe oard kesboard Program Select Bank Program amp Popup aooo gt aooo gt aooo gt aooo gt aooo gt ABBa gt aooo gt aooo KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran am s Peo A Pos Play Mute Rec Solo 3 Use the numeric pee to ae the number of the new song that you want to create and press the ENTER button For example press the 1 switch and then the ENTER button A dialog box will appear If you pressed the Song Select popup to access the Song No dialog box press the desired song number to open the dialog box Create new song this song No Set Length Ea Are you sure Cancel OK 4 Use Set Length to input the desired number of measures and press the OK button You can change the number of measures later if desired For details please see Set Song Length on page 176 of the Parameter Guide 5 Press the OK button to create the song Tip You can use the ENTER button instead of the OK but
170. f a physical hi hat GLOBAL GEHATE Si 22 INT Basic Kit 1 PILLAR ILRI aa F 3 E Voice Assign Mode _ Single Trigger Exclusive Group Wetec VY G m Assign m Enable Note On Receive _ Enable Note Off Receive S Mixer Pan RO84 Bus IFX Output Select L R FX Control Bus off Send1 to MFX1 000 Send2 to MFX2 017 Sample Sample Driver Velocity Voice Returntoosc Sute Param eg Sete Mixer 107 108 Using Drum Kits Sustaining the sound even after the key is re leased Hold Use the Hold function for instruments that should continue sustaining even after the key is released such as a crash cymbal The way this works will depend on the settings of the program and drum kit Set the Hold function as follows 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic Controllers Note On Scale page If you jumped to the Global P5 Drum Kit page by pressing the Jump to Drum kit Edit button from Program mode you can return to Program mode by pressing the Return to OSC button 2 Under Key Zone make sure that the Hold check box is checked Once you ve turned on Hold for the Program the function is controlled on a note by note basis according to settings within the Drum Kit 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 4 For each key set the Enable Note Off Receive parameter as desired If this check box is not selected notes will be held and the sound will continue even afte
171. ff 001 Off Q Linear B5 off 001 Off Q Linear 7 off _ 001 Off Q Linear amp off Pam 1 i Sample Sample Driver Velocity Voice Return to 05C Split A A A Splash Normal Dance Scratch Voice i Fine tuning the sound of each sample 1 If you like adjust the Levels for the two Drumsamples This can be very useful in creating a smooth velocity split or crossfade 2 As necessary specify the tuning EG parameters and filter Access the P5 Drum Kit Sample Parameter page Adjust Tune Attack Amp EG Attack Decay Amp EG Decay Cutoff and Resonance for each drumsample 3 You can also edit the drive boost and EQ for each drumsample Access the P5 Drum Kit Drive EQ page Adjust Drive Low Boost and 3 Band EQ Gain dB for each drumsample 4 Repeat Basic Editing on page 106 to set up each key of the Drum Kit 5 You can also copy settings from one key to another using the Copy Key Setup menu command Using Exclusive Groups 1 Access the P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 2 Use the Exclusive Groups to make one drum sound cut off another drum sound such as closed and open hi hats For example let s say that you ve assigned an open hi hat and a closed hi hat to the same exclusive group e Play the open hi hat sound e While it s still ringing play the closed hi hat e The open hi hat sound will be cut off simulating the action o
172. fferent Program parameters including e Pitch for vibrato e Filters for wah effects e Volume for tremolo e Pan for auto panning The LFOs can modulate many other parameters in addition to those listed above Using the basic LFO 1 Access the Prog P5 LFO OSC1 LFO1 page Waveform Fron G OSCI LFO1 E CARES v IG titer Phase 00 Frequency 68 Shape 00 L Stop AMS Off Int 88 Key Sync Offset 00 Fade 00 Delay 88 Frequency Modulation AMS 1 Note Number Intensity 00 IntModAMS Off Intensity 88 AMS2 JS y cc a1 Intensity 00 S Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync MIDI Tempo Sync Base Note J Times 1 ba E 2 Select the Waveform parameter Use the INC and DEC buttons to scroll through the different waveforms and look at their shapes in the graphic display There are a number of waveforms to choose from Each are suited to different applications Triangle and Sine are the classic LFO shapes for vibrato tremolo panning and filter wah effects Square is useful for gated on and off filter and amp effects and can create trills when modulating pitch The Guitar waveform is designed especially for guitar vibrato it bends only upwards from the base value Saw and Exponential Saw Down are good for rhythmic filter and amp effects Random 1 S H creates the classic sample and hold effect which is great for modulating a resonant filter 3 Af
173. for the Wet Dry parameter the stereo input signal will be output in stereo without being processed by the effect If you select Wet effect applied the processed signal will be output in one of the following ways Mono In Mono Out a Effect E F Wet Mono In Stereo Out Effect 3 u Effect Stereo In Stereo Out Effect Master Effects Master Effects MFX1 and MFX2 are stereo in stereo out Send1 and Send2 determine the send level to the Master Effects With Master effects only the Wet processed signal will be output The output signals from the Master Effects are routed to the L R bus with the output level specified by Return1 and Return2 These output signals are mixed with the output signals from the bus specified by Bus IFX Output Select P8 Routing page in each mode L R or with the output signals from the bus specified by Bus IFX Output Select P8 Insert FX Setup page in each mode L R then routed to the total effect Selecting 000 No Effect will mute the output The processed signal will be output in one of the following ways according to the type of effects Wet Mono In Stereo Out Stereo In Stereo Out Total Effect The total effect TFX is stereo in stereo out The Dry unprocessed side of the Wet Dry parameter sends the stereo input sound directly to the stereo output The way that the Wet processed side is output depends on the type of effect as follows Mono In Mono
174. g plays back RPPR can be played in synchronization with the playback of a song Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEQ will synchronize to the playback of the song Start the song playback and then press the key The pattern playback will start in synchronization with the measures of the song amp Synchronization will be lost if you use the REW 44 or FF gt gt buttons while a song is playing Note If you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the moment that song playback begins it is a good idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical data before the song playback begins Note If the song is stopped the pattern will synchronize to the timing of the arpeggiator Realtime recording an RPPR performance You can record the realtime performance generated by RPPR Recording an RPPR performance The RPPR playback can be recorded as performance data on the track s assigned to each pattern This means that you ll use either single track recording or multi track recording as appropriate for the track settings or performance style of the RPPR you re playing On the other hand even if RPPR uses only one track use multi track recording if you will be recording another track at the same time You should also select multi track recording if you specified the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather than just a single track and want to simultaneously record the performance of multiple tracks H
175. gain If the same error occurs it is possible that the data on the media has been damaged Error in writing to media Meaning A verification error occurred while writing data to a media To solve this problem e Itis possible that the media has been physically damaged Try another media Avoid using the media that produced the error F File already exists Meaning When executing a Create Directory or File Rename procedure a directory or file of the same name already exists on the media Meaning When executing the Media mode Utility Copy command without using wild cards the copy destination contained a file of the same name as the copy source e Either delete the existing directory or file or specify a different name Error messages Error and confirmation messages File unavailable Meaning You attempted to load or open a file whose format was incorrect File path not found Meaning When executing the Delete command in the Media mode Utility page the specified file did not exist Meaning When executing the Copy command in the Media mode Utility page and you used a wild card to specify the copy file name the specified file was not found Alternatively the length of the copy source path name exceeded 76 characters Meaning In Media mode when you used the Open button to open a directory the path length including the selected directory name exceeded 76 characters e Check the file or directory Me
176. ge MATEA v JO Cat 120 00 Bank A To sont J 61005 Boom Pow Pad ARP CONTROLS ARPEGGIATOR RUN GATE 00 YEL 00 m A ae 0 SWING STEP 00 6 Arpeggiator A Pattern U 789 INT Dr Boom Pow Beat Resolution 3 KROBE 3 28 o 3 Octave 1 O2 O Sort _ Key Sync O3 O4 Latch C Keyboard Prog Prog 1 8 9 16 Arpeggiator B J 120 00 Category gt 10 Synth KROBE Bank A 01005 Boom Pow Pad GATE 00 VEL 00 a e a SWING 80 STEP 00 6 Arpeggiator B Pattern U0418 INT Syn Boom Pow Seq Resolution HE EEE 23 333 33 325 Octave 1 O 2 O Sort C Key Sync O3 O4 L Latch C Keyboard Prog Prog ARP Tone 1 8 9 16 A Adjust e In Timbre Assign you ll see that arpeggiator A is assigned to timbres 1 5 and arpeggiator B is assigned to timbres 6 and 7 When you play the keyboard the drum programs of timbres 1 4 will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A Timbre 5 is a dummy program used to play timbres 1 4 See page 91 Arpeggiator B will sound the programs of timbres 6 and 7 e If you uncheck Arpeggiator Run A or Arpeggiator Run B it will stop If you check it once again and play the keyboard that arpeggiator will begin running e When you access the Combi P7 ARP DT ARP Scan Zone page you ll see that the B Top Ke
177. ge in semitones that will occur when MIDI pitch bend messages are received or when the joystick is moved to left or right A setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave upward a setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave downward Note You can also control pitch bend using a controller other than the joystick or via MIDI Ribbon 16 specifies the amount of pitch change in semitone units that will occur when MIDI control change message 16 is received With a setting of 12 a value of 127 will raise the pitch one octave and a value of 0 will lower the pitch one octave PROG LANIN iai E Pitch Cee v JO Pitch Slope JS X 02 AMS JS Y CC 82 Ribbon 16 02 JS X 02 Intensity 80 008 m Pitch EG Intensity 00 00 AMS Velocity Intensity 00 00 S Portamento HE LF O1 2 __ Enable LFO1 Int 00 00 AMS Off _ Fingered JS Y Int 80 00 Intensity 00 00 Mode Rate LFO2 Int 00 00 AMS Off Time 840 JS Y Int 00 00 Intensity 00 00 d f gt _ d Creating Vibrato You can use an LFO to create vibrato LFO1 Int or LFO2 Int sets the depth of how the selected LFO will affect the pitch With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change JS Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away from you Intensity AMS Intensity
178. giator while you play Using the arpeggiator in Program mode P1 DOWN DOWN roe P2 ALT1 e EE P3 ALT2 P4 RANDOM Changing the note value of the arpeggiated notes The Resolution parameter lets you set the note value of the arpeggiated notes over a range from s J e Press Resolution and use the VALUE dial INC DEC buttons or popup menu to select the desired arpeggio note value Selecting the octave range where the arpeggio is sounded Use the Octave radio buttons to specify the range of octaves where the arpeggio will play e Press an Octave radio button to make your selection Octave 4 TT UP Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the pitches in the chord you played You can select whether the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you played regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes or in the order in which you played the notes e Press the Sort check box in the display to make this setting Checked the arpeggio will play each note in the order of its pitch regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes Unchecked the arpeggio will trigger each note in the order in which you actually played the notes Sort Sort ON UP K Ess iasg Setting the arpeggio to continue playing even after you have
179. ginal version to control another Finally you can cascade the two AMS Mixers together by using AMS Mixer 1 as an input to AMS Mixer 2 For details please see 6 1 OSC1 AMS Mix1 on page 46 of the Parameter Guide Tips for using AMS When making settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modulation will be necessary to produce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Next select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example in a guitar sound program where you want to use the joystick to control the feedback you would make assignments so that the joystick controls the filter frequency and resonance Controller Setup page For each program the function of Realtime Control knobs 1 B 4 B and the SW1 and SW2 buttons can be assigned in the Prog P1 Basic Controllers Controllers Setup page For details please see Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 on page 41 and Setting the functions of Realtime Controls USER knobs 1 4 on page 42 Controlling Pitch Pitch bend Pitch bend smoothly changes the pitch upward or downward similar to how a guitarist can bend strings On the KROME you will normally use the joystick to control pitch bend in realtime The JS X and JS X settings specify the amount of pitch chan
180. gned to answer the question What does this do Organized by mode and page the Parameter Guide includes information on each and every parameter in the KROME Voice Name List The Voice Name List lists all of the sounds and setups that are in the KROME when it is shipped from the factory including Programs Combinations Multisamples Drumsamples Drum Kits Arpeggio Patterns Drum Track Patterns Template Songs and Effect Presets PDF versions The KROME PDF manuals are designed for easy navigation and searching They include extensive PDF contents information which generally appears on the side of the window in your PDF reader and lets you jump quickly to a specific section All cross references are hyper links so that clicking on them automatically takes you to the source of the reference Conventions in this manual References to the KROME The KROME is available in 88 key 73 key and 61 key models The manuals refer to all models without distinction as the KROME The front panel and rear panel illustrations in the manual show the 61 key model but they apply identically to the other models Abbreviations for the manuals QS OG PG VNL In the documentation references to the manuals are abbreviated as follows OS Quick Start Guide OG Operation Guide PG Parameter Guide VNL The Voice Name List Symbols 4 W Note Tips These symbols respectively indicate a caution a MIDI related explanation
181. hannel such as the keyboard MIDI IN and arpeggiator If multiple note on events are received simultaneously the highest velocity value is shown e Since this shows the note on velocity values it will not be affected by the settings of the volume knob or by changes in the audio signal level Overview Program Banks As program banks the KROME provides the six banks A F and the GM banks GM g d With the factory settings the KROME has 640 preload programs in banks A E Bank F contains only initialized programs Programs you ve created should be stored in this bank With the exception of the GM g d banks you are free to save by overwriting these program memory areas You can also save these programs on an SD card Programs are organized into six banks as shown in the following table Program bank contents internal multisamples With the factory settings A E 000 127 Sto Programs effects and arpeggiator these banks contain a wide variety of preloaded programs that use the E 000 127 Initialized Use these to create a Programs program from scratch GM2 main These banks contain 256 Sia GM programs and nine GM g 1 GM2 variation drum programs that are g 9 001 128 programs compatible with the GM2 sound map The programs of these banks are read only Bank GM contains the GM programs GM lets you select 128 programs g d 001 128 ae numbered from 001 128 and g 1 g d lets you select nine
182. he state of the combination at the same time return to Combination mode and write the combination See page 115 Note When editing a user arpeggio pattern pay attention to the global MIDI channel the channel of each track and the arpeggiator assignments and make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit 95 96 Arpeggiator function Regarding arpeggjiator synchronization Key Sync parameter The timing of the arpeggiator notes depends on the state of the arpeggiator Key Sync check box If this box is checked the arpeggiator will start running at the first note on that occurs after you ve taken your hands completely off the keyboard If this box is unchecked the arpeggiator will run in synchronization with the internal external MIDI clock Below we will explain how synchronization occurs when the Key Sync check box is not checked Synchronization with Song Start and with MIDI realtime Start messages are excluded Synchronization between arpeggiators A and B In Combination and Sequencer modes the two arpeggiators can run simultaneously In this case if one arpeggiator is already running and you then run the other arpeggiator with Key Sync unchecked the second arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the first arpeggiator If Key Sync is checked arpeggiators A and B will run independently each at their own tempo Synchroniza
183. he tempo you specify Note The tempo setting is also saved when you write a program 97 98 Drum Track function G If the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to External MIDI External USB or set to Auto and MIDI Clock messages are being received the display will indicate J EXT and the KROME will be synchronized to an external MIDI device In this case you won t be able to change the tempo by using the KROME Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Main page Drum Track Play Mute Solo On Off Volume Mixer amp Drum Track yY JO Category J 109 00 Bank A gt 00 Keyboa J J000 KROME G a OSC 1 osce DRU RACK ap mp EE Preset mE pattern O P039 8 Beat Pop 1 All ank No S ig Program D Tak rum trac TAA ay A017 Jazz Dry Ambience Kit Program Drum Track EQ l p 3 20k LHIGH z2 02 5 03 0 01 0 Sm 2 Select a Drum Track pattern Use Pattern Bank to select the preset or the user bank and use Pattern No to select the pattern number 3 Use Drum Track Program to select the program that will play the Drum Track pattern Note You can only select programs of category number 15 Drums If you want to use an original program you created as the Drum Track program save it with Category set to 15 see page 30 Note If you ve se
184. he types for Filter A and Filter B The filters will produce very different results depending on the selected filter type P3 Filter Filter Routing O Single Parallel O Serial 24dB 4Pole Filter As F ilter B Type _ Bypass Type Low Pass Trim 99 ican v iG 4 _ Bypass Frequency 99 Frequency 99 Trim 99 AMS Int 0 Resonance 00 AMS Int 0 AMS Velocity Resonance 60 AMS Velocity Output 99 AMS Int 00 Output 99 AMS Velocity AMS Velocity o gt fa fo c ll ce fa Low Pass This cuts out the parts of the sound that are higher than the cutoff frequency Low Pass is the most common type of filter and is used to make bright timbres sound darker AMSInt 00 High Pass This cuts out the parts of the sound that are lower than the cutoff frequency You can use this to make timbres sound thinner or more buzzy Band Pass This cuts out all parts of the sound both highs and lows except for the region around the cutoff frequency Since this filter cuts out both high and low frequencies its effect can change dramatically depending on the cutoff setting and the oscillator s multisample With low resonance settings you can use the Band Pass filter to create telephone or vintage phonograph sounds With higher resonance settings it can create buzzy or nasal timbres Band Reject This filter type also called a notch filter cuts only the parts of the soun
185. hem Then in Program mode you can adjust filter and amp settings and specify effects and routing to the audio output jacks See page 105 To use a drum kit in a Program set Oscillator Mode to Drums or Double Drums and choose one of the 48 user drum kits or the nine GM2 drum kits Selecting a drum kit 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic Controllers Program Basic page 2 Set Oscillator Mode to Drums or Double Drums m Oscillator Mode O Single QO Double Drums Double Drums osc Picture 1 LETTE jas 3 Select a drum kit in the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Setup page PROG DAAA mg OSC1 Octave 0 8 Transpose 80 Tune 0000 Freq Offset 80 0 Hz Dk K it I J00 INT Jazz Ambi Kit Dry OSC1 Setup v JO Jump to DrumKit Edit 4 Specify the basic pitch of the oscillator For a drum kit set Octave to 0 8 Detailed Editing with Programs Creating time varying changes LFO and EG Creating time varying changes LFO and EG Using LFOs You can use the cyclic change produced by the LFO Low Frequency Oscillator to modulate numerous aspects of the sound Each Program has two LFOs LFO1 and LFO2 There is also a single Common LFO shared by both Oscillators While LFO1 and LFO2 are separate for each voice the Common LFO is shared by all voices in the Program This makes it useful when you want all of the voices to have an identical LFO effect You can use these LFOs to modulate many di
186. his problem can be solved be executing the menu command Half Damper Calibration Global P0 Basic Setup gt PG p 217 No beep sounds when you touch the display Check the Beep Enable check box Global PO Basic Setup System Preferences gt p 110 Audio output No sound Are connections made correctly to your amp mixer or headphones gt p 17 Is the connected amp or mixer powered on and is its volume raised Is Local Control turned on e In Global P1 MIDI check the Local Control On check box gt PG p 198 Could the VOLUME knob be turned all the way to the left gt p 1 Is the Master Volume assigned to Foot Pedal Assign and is that pedal volume lowered gt p 19 Could the program be muted gt p 27 If a specific timbre doesn t sound in Combination mode is its Play Mute button set to Play Alternatively are all Solo button settings turned off gt p 46 If a specific track doesn t sound in Sequencer mode is its Play Rec Mute button set to Play Alternatively are all Solo button settings turned off gt p 55 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH gt p 50 p 57 Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produced when you play gt PG p 14 p 84 p 129 Is the Oscillator Drum Track Timbre or Track level lowered in the control surface mixer gt p 27 p 46 p 55 Could the level of the Master Volume following the total effect have been lowered gt PG p 62 p 99
187. hrases on unused tracks Transport control These controls let you play back record fast forward or rewind the sequencer Front panel buttons You can use the front panel SEQUENCER buttons to control recording and playback on the sequencer O TEMPO PAUSE ii FF 120 y SEQUENCER A 40 300 TAP eget Saget Ka LOCATE REC START STOP PAUSE II button This button pauses the playback of the song When paused the button s LED will light up Press PAUSE IH once again to resume playback and the LED will turn off REW lt lt button When the Song is playing or paused this button will rewind the song When you press and hold this button its LED will light up and the playback will rewind Rewind is disabled during recording and while the Song is stopped Note You can use the FF REW Speed menu command to specify the fast forward and rewind speed FF gt gt button When the Song is playing or paused this button will fast forward the song When you press and hold this button the button will light up and the playback will fast forward Fast forward is disabled during recording and while the Song is stopped LOCATE I lt button By pressing the LOCATE I button you can move to a specified locate point By default you ll move to 001 01 000 To change the locate point that s assigned to the LOCATE k button use the menu command Set Location Alternatively you can se
188. hronize to the KROME s MIDI timing clock and realtime commands connect the KROME s MIDI OUT to your external MIDI device s MIDIIN or connect the KROME s USB port to your computer s USB port Set MIDI Clock to Internal Note The same applies if MIDI Clock Auto and MIDI realtime clock messages are being transmitted see page 111 Synchronization via MIDI clock The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the KROME Creating a Drum Track pattern Once you ve converted the pattern in this way you ll be able to use it with the drum track in each mode These converted Drum Track patterns are held in internal memory even after you turn off the power This means you can manage them together with the programs and combinations Preparing a user pattern You ll first need to prepare the user pattern that you want to convert to a Drum Track pattern To create a user pattern you can realtime record it see page 65 in the Seq P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page or step record it see page 167 of the Parameter Guide Alternatively performance data from a track can be imported into a pattern meaning that performance data you ve created in a track or SMF data you ve loaded in Media mode can be used as a user pattern To do this execute the Get From Track menu command in the Seq P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page see page 187 of the Parameter Guide Converting to a Drum Track pattern 1
189. i rn Edit Ze Aian S008 NEW SONG Track 9 MIDI TRACK 9 A00O KROME Clrand Piano Pattern User MJD J 120 00 Only REC Resolution Hi MUSED IN SONG TRACK GAN ECI GEN GES EES ECI ac EEI EE a RE a ES TS EEUSED IN RPPR a8 REI EEN ECI EEI ECI Era RES REI U a ee ee Jj JJ aS Se SS eS es es es S JJ OO O O O O O O O O O O Pattern Pattern RPPR y 3 Use Track Select to choose the track that you will use to record the pattern The pattern will play back with the program and other settings of the selected track 4 Set Pattern Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern Select to U00 User patterns U00 U99 can be created for each song 5 Select the menu command Pattern Parameter 65 66 Creating songs Sequencer mode A dialog box will appear Set Pattern Parameter of UOO Meter 4 4 Length Cancel OK 6 Set the number of measures in the pattern to a Length of 04 four measures and set Meter to a time signature of 4 4 Press the OK button 7 As necessary set REC Resolution to apply realtime quantization 8 Begin realtime recording You can record in the same way as you did when recording tracks with Loop All Tracks See Loop All Tracks on page 60 Press the SEQUENCER REC button and then press the START STOP gt W button After the pre count patt
190. ile a combination triggers the Drum Track pattern on the global MIDI channel a song triggers the Drum Track pattern on the MIDI channel specified by the Drum Pattern Input Normally you ll set this to Tch With the Tch setting the MIDI channel of the track selected by Track Select will automatically be used as the trigger channel For details please see Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program on page 98 Wilma VY G P7 ARP DT Drum Pattern Pattern Preset P001 Pop amp Ballad 1 All Shift 00 MIDI Channel Input Trigger Mode Start Immediately Output 02 Sync Off Setup Setup ARP ARP Scan 1 8 9 16 A B Zone A A Af A In Sequencer mode you can use the Drum Track function while realtime recording a song track or pattern The note on off data transmitted by the Drum Track pattern can be recorded as events in a track or pattern amp You can t use note data from the internal sequencer as a trigger to start patterns for the Drum Track function When you ve used the Drum Track function with a program or combination to come up with an idea for a song you can then use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start realtime recording see page 59 MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Sequencer mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive The drum track will receive on the MIDI channel specified by
191. in the Routing T01 08 page You can set it from either page FX Control Bus sends the output of the timbre to an FX Control bus Use this when you want the audio input to an effect to be controlled by another sound There are two FX Control buses which gives you a great deal of freedom for controlling effects freely For details please see FX Control Buses on page 238 of the Parameter Guide Insert effects 5 Access the Combi P8 Routing IFX Insert FX Setup page COMBI Mik H Ti ale DOBO InitCombi DOBO Insert Effect Chain To Chain Pan 8 Bus Sel FX Ctri SendI Senda 1 ts IFX2 OFF 884 Multiband Limiter 2 ar IFX3 078 L C R BPM e 2 LR qoft d U IFx4 64 Multiband Limiter On O _ L R Off BOO 0600 036 Ensemble C064 O MAREA VY G Off On A L R Off 000 000 88 Reverb Room C064 6 Select an insert effect in IFX1 5 and edit the settings 7 Access the IFX1 5 pages to edit the individual effect parameters These settings can be adjusted in the same way See page 79 M You can use MIDI to control dynamic modulation Dmod for each effect the post IFX pan CC 8 and Send 1 and Send 2 levels An asterisk is shown at the right of Ch01 Ch16 for the channel number of tracks routed to IFX If you ve routed multiple tracks that have different MIDI channel settings this specifies the channel on which they will be controlled Master effects an
192. ination measure is within the source range To solve this problem e Set a destination measure that is outside of the source range Destination is empty Meaning When editing the track or pattern that was specified as the destination contains no musical data To solve this problem e Select a track or pattern that contains musical data Destination measure is empty Meaning The measure that was specified as the destination contains no data e Specify a destination measure that contains data Destination song is empty Meaning The song that was specified as the copy destination or bounce destination does not exist e Execute the Create New Song command in the dialog box that appears when a new song is selected before copying or bouncing See page 57 Directory is not empty Cleanup directory Are you sure Meaning When deleting a directory files or directories exist within that directory e Press the OK button to delete all files and or directories within that directory E Error in formatting media Meaning An error occurred while performing a physical format full format or high level format quick format of the media To solve this problem e Use other media Error in reading from media Meaning An error occurred while reading data from media This error may also appear when data is being written to media by a Save or Copy operation To solve this problem e Execute the reading procedure once a
193. including the routing type cutoff frequency and resonance are set on the P3 1 Filter page Filter Routing Each oscillator has two filters Filter A and Filter B The Filter Routing parameter controls whether one or both of the filters are used and if both are used it controls how they are connected to each other The Single routing uses only Filter A as a single 2 pole 12dB octave filter 6dB for Band Pass and Band Reject The Serial routing uses both Filter A and Filter B The oscillator first goes through Filter A and then the output of Filter A is processed through Filter B Parallel also uses both Filter A and Filter B The oscillator feeds both filters directly and allow independent settings for each and the outputs of the two filters are then summed together The 24dB 4Pole routing merges both filters to create a single 4 pole 24dB octave filter 12dB for Band Pass and Band Reject In comparison to Single this option produces a sharper roll off of frequencies beyond the cutoff frequency as well as a slightly more delicate resonance Many classic analog synths used this type of filter Serial and Parallel Routing Serial Oscillator Filter A Low Pass Filter B High Pass Parallel Filter A Low iter A trow Pass Filter Types This selects the parts of the sound that will be affected by the filter as described below With the Serial and Parallel routings you can independently set t
194. io pattern About user arpeggio patterns The patterns that can be selected on the KROME s arpeggiator are called arpeggio patterns There are two types of arpeggio patterns preset arpeggio patterns and user arpeggio patterns Preset arpeggio patterns There are five patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM The functionality of these patterns is fixed and cannot be edited User arpeggio patterns There are 1028 patterns UOOO0 INT U1027 USER which can develop chords or phrases in a wide variety of ways based on the pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing with which you play them In Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup you can modify these user arpeggio patterns or create a new user arpeggio pattern from an initialized condition Edited user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal memory areas UN000 INT U1027 USER see page 221 of the Parameter Guide In Media mode you can also save user arpeggio patterns to media Editing a user arpeggio pattern amp If you want to edit a user arpeggio pattern you must first make sure that memory protect is unchecked See page 197 of the Parameter Guide If you enter this mode from the Program mode your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for the selected program 1 In Program mode select a program which uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit or a program that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio patt
195. ion Hi m RPPR Ch 01 RPPR C 2 D2 D 2 E2 F2 F 2 S 5 7 E T01 E091 Basic Kiti 1 2 4 Category PS gt 00 gt 00 Drums j Keyboard j Keyboard J Keyboard j Keyboard j Keyboard Keyboard j Keyboard j Bank Program aoo aooo aoo aoo aooo aooo aooo Basic Kit KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran 2 Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on Set the RPPR on off for each song 3 Play the keyboard and patterns will begin playing according to the RPPR settings If you want to play RPPR phrases from an external MIDI device you can control them on the MIDI channel of the track that s selected in Track Select e Pattern playback for keys where the Sync setting is Beat or Measure will synchronize to the pattern playback of the very first key played e If you are playing the pattern in synchronization when Sync is Beat Measure or SEQ the pattern will start accurately if you play the note slightly earlier than the timing of the beat or measure Even if you play the note slightly later than the beat or measure but no later than a 32nd note it will be considered to have started at the beat or measure and the beginning of the pattern will be compressed so that the remainder of the playback will be correct 4 To turn off the RPPR function uncheck the RPPR check box Play RPPR while a son
196. ion and higher settings create more obvious distortion Often it s useful to increase the Low Boost along with the Drive Note even when the Drive amount is set to 0 the Drive circuit still affects the timbre If your goal is a completely pristine sound use the Bypass control instead Low Boost is a special low frequency EQ which controls the body character of the sound The specific EQ frequencies affected will change with the Drive setting Higher amounts increase the bass boost and will also intensify the effect of the Drive parameter Making controller assignments Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 SW1 and SW2 are the two buttons above the joystick These on off buttons can perform a number of different functions such as modulating sounds or effects or locking the modulation values of the joystick Also each one may work either as a toggle or as a momentary switch In Toggle mode each press alternates between on and off in Momentary mode the switch only changes for as long as you hold it down Each Program Combination and Song stores its own settings for what the buttons will do and whether each button is on or off based on their current states when the data is saved You can set up Panel Switch Assign on the Controllers Setup page Mode Pae Prog P1 Basic Controllers Note The on off status of the SW1 and SW2 buttons will be preserved when you write the program or combination
197. is will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Start Immediately If blinking The Drum Track pattern will be ready to start It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI note on is received This will occur if the Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger Adjusting the performance tempo You can use the TEMPO knob or the TAP button to adjust the performance tempo Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program Unlike its functionality in Program mode the Drum Track function in Combination mode does not have its own dedicated track timbre The program that plays the Drum Track pattern will use the timbre that you specify 1 In the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page or T09 16 page select the timbre that you want to use for the drum track and then select the Drum Track program Performing with the Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode In the following illustration we ve selected timbre 5 for use by the drum track COMB AAEL Program T81 08 YC Bank A gt So kena 7 000 Piano amp Strings KROBE TO5 E105 Tekno Klub Kit Ch 10 1 E El 5 7 B Category 2a Pea NPN Pas gt 15 gt 20 gt ee 8 f gt eo lkegbaard Strings LeadSunt Bass Syn Drums Keyboard Keyboard ecutienra Bank Program aoo Boa Oe Ocie OREN O ao Cao aooo KROME Gran Symphonic Sine Lead TRI Bass 1 Tekno Klub k KROME Gran KROME Gran KRO
198. isable the animation that appears when a popup is displayed 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup System Preferences page 2 If the Value Edit Pop up Realtime Controls Pop up and Animation check box are cleared the respective function will be disabled Note If the KROME is processing large amounts of musical data such as from the drum track or sequencer the realtime control popups or animation effects might be disabled automatically in some cases MIDI Settings GLOBAL ABX MPT VY iG Global MIDI MIDI Setup channel _ _Racie MIDI Channel ol Local _ __ m Local Control On Note Receive All ntrol Por Convert Position PreMIDI MIDI Clock Internal O Auto MIDI clock O External MIDI External USB settings SEQ Mode Track MIDI Out for Master Param MIDI Out Control Change DrumTrack Prog MIDI Ch 124 L Prog MIDI Out oe Os GLOBAL ARIDI MIDI Routing VY IG SMD Routing ARP Controllers MIDI Out Control Change SysEx Param Chang SD Filter Global MIDI m Enable Program Change Enable After Touch filter settings m Bank Change m Enable Control Change m Combination Change m Enable Exclusive MIDI MIDI Basic Routing Global MIDI Channel The Global MIDI Channel is the most important MIDI related setting in the KROME It determines the main MIDI channel used for both Program and Combination modes for instance To set the Gl
199. it cell slider or knob twice in quick Enable Edit Pad check box in the menu found in succession a pad for inputting numbers or using a Global P0 Basic Setup System Preferences see calculator will appear The various buttons have the page 111 following functions EG Velocity Split e OPERATION DIRECT CALCULATE Switches You can change the values of a EG or velocity split between numerical input pad and calculator 8 Xap object by dragging in the display e CE clear entry Clears the currently input number e Ent Enters the number from the pad into the parameter and closes the pad e RECALL Copies the parameter value into the pad e Close Closes the pad Velocity Split Numerical input pad Calculator 127 IE OPERATION or OPERATION 5 DIRECT CALCULATE X i DIRECT CALCULATE X Master Tune Master Tune RECALL INS Note Some parameters cannot use the calculator function Realtime control popup Bank and number select pad When you use a REALTIME CONTROLS knob a If you press twice in succession on Program Select POEe will indicate the function that s being controlled Combination Select or Timbre Select the bank and and its value A certain length of time after you stop number select pad will appear using the knob this popup will close automatically If you press the popup while it s displayed it will stay
200. ks while you record new tracks Let s try out the Mute and Solo functions 1 Use Song Select to select the song that you want to play back 2 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button 3 Press track 1 Play Rec Mute The display will change from Play to Mute and the playback of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way the mute function allows you to silence a specified track until the track is un muted Press track 2 Play Rec Mute The display will change and the playback of track 2 will also be muted To cancel muting press Play Rec Mute once again Cy S e e e e os e l 4 Press track 1 Solo On Off Solo will be highlighted and this time only the performance of track 1 will be heard To play back only a specified track by itself in this way is known as soloing the track turning Solo on If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority Press track 2 Solo On Off The display will change and you will hear the playback of tracks 1 and 2 You won t hear the sound of tracks 3 16 T T E lt I T T B G wn nh 0O C D Ea eS 5 To switch Solo off press Solo On Off once again Press Solo On Off for both tracks 1 and 2 The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the Play
201. l KROME setings Curve 9 is designed specifically for playing piano sounds from the weighted NH keyboards in the 73 note and 88 note models For details on the other curves see the graphic below as well as the Velocity Curve section on page 194 of the Parameter Guide 3 Specify the position where the velocity curve will be applied For more about Convert Position please see Transposing the keyboard above Velocity curves Convert Position PostMIDI Velocity MIDI In to sound engines MAX Convert Position PreMIDI Velocity Keyboard to MIDI Out Bypassing the effects You can bypass the KROME s insert effects master effects and total effects These settings will bypass the effects in all modes If you re using effects such as reverb or chorus provided by an external effect processor mixer or DAW you can bypass the KROME s own effects so that they will not be used 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Basic page 2 Use the various Effect Global SW buttons to select the effects that you want to bypass The effect will be bypassed if the check box is cleared Clearing the IFX 1 5 box Bypasses the insert effects Clearing the MFX 1 amp 2 box Bypasses the master effects Clearing the TFX 1 amp 2 box Bypasses the total effects MFX1 amp 2 and TFX can also be controlled by the front panel MASTER FX button and TOTAL FX button This is convenient when
202. l button Done button and Exit button Done Copy and Insert buttons There are buttons which perform function when they are pressed and released such as Done Copy and Insert similar to the OK and Cancel buttons explained under Dialog box above I Stopwatch button When you press the button on the upper right of the display the time elapsed since power on will be displayed You can use the START STOP button and RESET button to measure elapsed time This is Introduction to the KROME convenient when you want to check the time during a Value slider Wheel pad live performance or rehearsal or to determine the When you hold down an edit cell slider or knob for a approximate playback time of a song while and then release it the wheel value slider will e START STOP Starts or stops the stopwatch appear e RESET Returns the time to 000 00 00 To change the value drag the wheel slider pad _STOP _ viJ SLIDER ACTION start reset v RD WHEEL SLIDER TO1 Volume 1800 m Radio buttons Press a radio button to select one value from two or more choices PROG MARETA E Program Basic ACTION m Radio buttons Bi a i Double O Drums O Double Drums aiz WHEEL SLIDER x OSC Picture 1 1 Acoustic Piano T 1 Volume 1 00 2 O EEE hs cai pa GGG 1 Numerical input pad calculator Note If you don t want the edit pad to appear clear the If you press an ed
203. ld select the copy destination track In the Measure field specify the starting measure of the copy destination Following the pattern name for each of the 605 preset patterns the musical style and the name of the most suitable Drums category program are partially displayed By loading a drums track and the corresponding preset pattern you can instantly set up a drum track appropriate for each preset template song 6 To execute this operation press the OK button When you execute this procedure the Measure field will count up automatically showing how many measures of the selected pattern have been placed in the selected song You can then copy another pattern if desired or add more measures of the same pattern When you re finished press the Exit button Copying the settings of a combination or program You can copy the settings of a combination or program into the sequencer This can be done in the following ways e Auto Song Setup Auto Song Setup is a function that copies the settings of the selected combination in Combination mode or program in Program mode to the song in Sequencer mode e Menu commands Copy From Combi or Copy From Program See pages 166 167 of the Parameter Guide In Sequencer mode you can use these page menu commands to copy the desired settings Recording Preparations for recording Auto Song Setup function 1 Enter Combination mode 2 In PO Play page select the desired co
204. lected an empty pattern the DRUM TRACK button will not function These parameters can also be set from P7 ARP DT page Setting the EQ volume mute and solo for the drum track pattern In the Prog P0 Play Mixer amp Drum Track page you can use a 3 band EQ to adjust the sound of the drum track program You can also edit the volume mute and solo settings Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode Selecting a combination and turning the Drum Track function on off 1 Press the COMBI button to enter Combination mode and select the desired combination For details please see Selecting Combinations on page 43 COMBI Bank A J000 Piano amp Strings T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch 1 E E 5 5 Program 101 68 SWAB Category J 078 00 gt 00 Keyboard KROBE Category SaS gt 11 08 gt 0 2 Keyboard j Strings J Leadsynt Bass Syn Drums J Keyboard J Keyboard Keyboard J Bank Program Ag Be20 E23 C104 O E105 aooo aooo aooo KROME Gran Symphonic fSine Lead TRI Bass 1 Tekno Klub k KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran _ i C 2 Press the DRUM TRACK button The ON OFF button will light up or blink depending on the setting Trigger Mode of the combination If lit The Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting When you turn it off the pattern will stop Th
205. lection of similarly voiced samples used to create the same type of sound piano bass guitar strings organ across the entire keyboard as the basis of a program The oscillators of single and double programs use multisamples There are 583 multisamples available in this instrument You can assign up to four multisamples to each oscillator and switch between them by velocity Multisamples and Drum Kits Multisamples and Drum Kits allow you to play samples in different ways e Multisamples lay out one or more samples across the keyboard If we use the example of a simple guitar multisample one sample could be assigned Detailed Editing with Programs Basic oscillator settings for each string so that the multisample would consist of six samples e As the name suggests Drum Kits are optimized for playing drumsamples Velocity splits crossfades and layers Each oscillator provides eight velocity zones This lets you switch between multisamples or drumsamples according to the velocity speed at which you play a key By specifying the threshold boundary value where each zone will respond and the amount of crossfading the overlap between zones you can specify how your keyboard playing dynamics will switch or layer the multisamples or drumsamples You can use this to make the following types of setups e Velocity splits where multisamples or drumsamples are cleanly switched at the threshold e Velocity crossfades
206. lock is currently being received via MIDI then neither the TEMPO knob nor the TAP button will have any effect TAP button You can set the tempo of the Arpeggiator or Drum Track function in Program Combination and Sequencer modes by lightly pressing or tapping the TAP button several times on the beat In Sequencer mode you can control the song tempo in this way To enter the tempo use your finger to gently tap the TAP button The tempo will be entered when you press the button twice but you should tap several times in order to increase the precision The average of the last sixteen taps will be specified as the tempo During playback lightly press the TAP button several times at the desired tempo The tempo will follow your tapping in realtime This is a convenient way to match the tempo in realtime to the beat of a different source amp You can use tap tempo control whenever the TEMPO knob can be used For example in Sequencer mode tap tempo control will not be available if you are playing a song where the Tempo Mode setting is set to Auto See page 110 of the Parameter Guide Note You can also use a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE FOOT SWITCH jack to control the tap 25 26 Playing and editing Programs tempo function see page 18 and pages 202 349 of the Parameter Guide Damper pedal Foot switch Foot pedal For details on using the damper pedal foot switch or pedal to control the sound ple
207. log boxes When a dialog box is displayed this has the same function as the Cancel Done or Exit button Initialize the KROME e With the power off press the power switch while holding down the ENTER button and numeric key 0 While data is being loaded the display will indicate Now writing into internal Memory The result will be the same as when you ve executed Load Preload Demo Data All See page 125 Basic operations 13 14 Introduction to the KROME Turning the power on off Connecting the AC adapter 1 Make sure that the KROME is powered off 2 Connect the DC plug of the included AC adapter to the power supply jack on the KROME s rear panel amp You must use only the included AC adapter Using any other AC adapter might cause malfunctions 3 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter 4 Plug the power cord into an AC outlet amp Be sure to use an AC outlet of the correct voltage for your adapter 5 Use the KROME s cable hook to fasten the cable so that the DC plug does not become accidentally disconnected AC adapter connections mM 4 Cable hook 1 Power supply jack Power switch amp J 4 a gt When fastening the cable to the cable hook take care not to bend this portion any more than necessary Ea 3 Power cord for AC adapter f AC adapter a E 2 Plug into AC outlet Turning the power on 1 Turn the
208. m o m m m n All Nothing Cancel ok In order to accurately reproduce the data you created we recommend that you check all of the boxes When you ve finished making settings press the OK button to close the dialog box 8 Press the OK button to execute the Save operation e If the data fits on one volume of media The data will be saved on the specified media and you will return to the Save page e If the data does not fit on one volume of media The No space available on media dialog box will appear No space available on media OF Press the OK button and the file will be divided and saved to multiple volumes of media If you don t want to divide the file press the Cancel button and re save it to larger capacity media For details please see If the data being saved does not fit on one volume of media on page 231 of the Parameter Guide 9 When saving ends and you return to the Save page the display will show the file that was saved The various types of data are saved as the following files e PCG file e SNG file Saving data Using the KROME as a data filer Cautions when saving If an identically named file exists on the media If a file with the same name already exists on the media you will be asked whether you want to overwrite If you wish to overwrite press the OK button If you want to save without overwriting press the Cancel button and rename
209. m the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator will automatically generate a wide range of phrases or patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns If the SELECT button is set to ARP you can use the knobs to vary the duration and dynamics of the arpeggiated notes For more about the arpeggiator please see page 85 Drum Track settings While you perform using a combination you can use the KROME s rich variety of drum patterns to play high quality drum programs Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a useful way to come up with new phrases For more about the Drum Track function please see page 97 Effects For details please see Using Effects on page 77 Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer mode The Auto Song Setup feature automatically applies the settings of the current Combination to a song For details please see Auto Song Setup function on page 59 Creating songs Sequencer mode Overview About the KROME s Sequencer The sequencer brings together the KROME s numerous functions such as its arpeggiator RPPR high performance effects and controllers allowing you to take advantage of these in a wide range of situations This sequencer is a 16 track MIDI sequencer that can store up to 128 songs and 210 000 MIDI events You can use it to record and play back notes for the internal sou
210. mally you will use this method to record and then modify the results by using other types of real time recording or MIDI event editing 1 Use Track Select to choose the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano E Recording Setup Overwrite Overdub Manual Punch In Ch 1 RPPR NoAssign Auto Punch In Loop All Tracks _ Multi REC 3 In Location specify the location where you wish to begin recording SEQ Gears rie v JO Location MRAN Meter 4 4 J 120 00 Manual 215000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 Resolution Hi LJ RPPR T 1 A Q G KROME Grand Piano 1 E E Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign E 7 B Category gt gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 Keyboard keyboard II keyboard keyboard keyboard II keyboard II keyboard II keyboard Bank Program gt aooo gt aooo gt aooa gt ABBA gt aooo gt aooo gt aooo gt ABO KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC button and then press the START STOP gt W button If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default settings the metronome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the joystick to record your performance 5 When you finish playing press the
211. mbination and edit the Arpeggiator etc as desired Note If you want to save the edited state of the combination use the Write Combination menu commands 3 Press the REC button Alternatively select the page menu command Auto Song Setup The Setup to Record dialog box will appear Setup to Record Do you continue Cancel OK 4 To execute the Auto Song Setup function press the REC button or the OK button If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button You will automatically move to Sequencer mode and the settings of the combination will be copied to the song The first unused song will be the copy destination song Contents automatically copied from a combi nation The copied contents will be the same as when you execute the menu command Copy From Combi with the following settings in the dialog box See page 166 of the Parameter Guide e IFXs MFXs TFX checked e Auto Adjust Arp setting for Multi REC checked Contents automatically copied from a pro gram The copied contents will be the same as when you execute the menu command Copy From Program with the following settings in the dialog box See page 167 of the Parameter Guide e IFXs MFXs TFX checked e Arp checked e To set to Track 01 e Arp setto A e with Drum Track checked e To Drum Track set to Track 10 e Check Recording Setup Multi REC e Set the Play Rec Mute setting to REC for tracks 01 and 10 see page
212. mbination you ve selected Key zone preview allows you to check the timbre s layer and split settings as well as how the arpeggiator is used e The keyboard area indicates the last single note on that was received on the global MIDI channel e The key zone area shows the timbres that will sound at the key position differentiated by several colors according to the settings of each timbre Green Timbres that are sounded on the global MIDI channel such as by the keyboard Yellow Timbres that will sound only when the arpeggiator is on see page 90 Orange Timbres that will sound only when the drum track is on Blue Timbres whose timbre channel is set to something other than the global channel These will not be sounded by the KROME s keyboard arpeggeiator or drum track but will sound in response to MIDI note on messages from an external device Purple These timbres are used to play an external sound module They do not sound on the KROME None Timbres whose timbre status is off These will not sound The velocity meter shows the note on velocity value e Note on velocities from the keyboard MIDI IN arpeggiator and drum track are shown for each timbre channel If multiple note on events occur simultaneously the highest velocity value will be shown e Since this shows the note on velocity values it is not affected by the setting of the Volume slider nor by changes in the audio signal level Also
213. me and press OK To edit a Sub Category name 1 Choose the Main Category from the popup menu 2 Edit the Sub Category names as described above Loading amp saving data Saving data Saving data on the KROME You can save the KROME s various types of data in the following ways e Writing to internal memory e Saving to an SD card commercially available e MIDI data dump Writing to internal memory The following types of data can be written into the internal memory e Program Programs 000 127 in banks A F e Combination Combinations 000 127 in banks A D e Global settings Global PO Basic Setup P4 Category e User drum kits OO INT 47 USER e User arpeggio patterns UO0000CINT U1027 USER e User Drum Track patterns U000 U999 See page 97 e User template songs U00 U15 Song settings such as the song name and tempo track settings see page 106 of the Parameter Guide arpeggiator and effect settings can be saved written to internal memory However the musical data for song tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory Furthermore settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Meter Metronome PLAY MUTE Track Play Loop including Start End measure and RPPR settings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode menu command Save Template Song to write this data for details please see page 164 of the Parameter Guide e Effect presets For each effect you c
214. me of all connected equipment and turn off the power 2 Connect the KROME s OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks to the input jacks of your powered monitor speakers or mixer Note If you connect only the L MONO jack the L and R sound will be mixed for monaural output In order to take full advantage of the KROME s capabilities we recommend that you listen in stereo If you re playing back through your stereo audio system or a cassette radio that has external input connectors connect the KROME to the jacks that are marked LINE IN AUX IN or external input You might need to obtain the appropriate adapter plug or conversion cable Powered monitor speakers a 0 om mo Maso me po SY oo c il PHONES CO Headphones Connecting headphones amp Using headphones at high volume for an extended time may cause hearing damage Please avoid excessively high volume levels 1 Connect the stereo mini plug of your headphones to the KROME s Headphone jack 2 Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the headphone volume The KROME s Headphone jack will output the same signal as the OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks The output from the OUTPUT jack is not turned off even if headphones are connected to the Headphone jack Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal If you connect an optional damper pedal foot switch or foot pe
215. memory even when the power is turned off Track settings and effect settings of a song you create can be saved in internal memory by using the menu command Save Template Song e For details on writing to internal memory gt p 115 Refer to the following pages for more information about saving e Saving a song gt p 75 e Saving to media Media Save gt p 118 Note On the KROME the action of writing to internal memory is called Write and the action of saving to an SD card device is called Save Assigning a name renaming You can edit the name of an edited program combination song drum kit or arpeggio pattern You can also change the names of the program and combination categories For details please see Editing names on page 117 Shortcuts Selecting a GM bank program e Bank GM Hold down the 0 numeric key and press e Banks g 1 g 9 Hold down the 0 numeric key and press 1 9 e Bank g d Hold down the numeric key 0 and press Moving between pages within a mode e By holding down the PAGE button and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can jump to the corresponding page Access the menu commands in each page up to ten items e By holding down the ENTER button and pressing a numeric key 0 9 Input note number values or velocity values e While holding down the edit cell in the display press a note on the keyboard Alternatively select the edit cell in the display and then hold
216. mple 7 Multisample 8 Arpeggiator AMP1 PITCH1 FILTER1 DRIVERI Multisample 1 Drum Kit Multisample 4 Multisample 5 Multisample 2 Multisample 6 Drum Track Multisample 7 DRUMS PROGRAM Multisample 8 Multisample 3 Multisample 4 AMP2 PITCH2 FILTER2 DRIVER2 GLOBAL MODE COMBINATION Insert Master Total Effect DRUM KIT Key Assign TIMBRE 1 PROGRAM TIMBRE 9 PROGRAM Cxi _ e e TIMBRE 3 PROGRAM TIMBRE 11 PROGRAM Drumsample 2 Drumsample 6 EE TIMBRE 4 PROGRAM TIMBRE 12 PROGRAM Drumsample 3 Drumsample 7 TIMBRE 5 PROGRAM TIMBRE 13 PROGRAM Arpeggiator Drumsample 4 j Drumsample 8 TIMBRE6 PROGRAM TIMBRE 14 PROGRAM Arpeggiator TIMBRE7 PROGRAM TIMBRE 15 PROGRAM TIMBRE 8 PROGRAM TIMBRE 16 PROGRAM ARPEGGIO PATTERN Drum Track Preset Pattern PO 4 User Pattern SEQUENCER MIDI TRACK 1 16 Insert Master Total Effect Oee TRACK1 PROGRAM TRACK 9 PROGRAM TRACK2 PROGRAM TRACK 10 PROGRAM TRACK 3 PROGRAM TRACK11 PROGRAM e TRACK4 PROGRAM TRACK12 PROGRAM Cxs__ TRACK5 PROGRAM TRACK13 PROGRAM Arpeggiator MEDIA MODE PCG SNG TRACK6 PROGRAM TRACK14 PROGRAM Arpeggiatot PCG TRACK7 PROGRAM TRACK15 PROGRAM TRACK8 PROGRAM TRACK16 PROGRAM Drum Track Preset Drum Track Pattern User Drum Track Pattern Basic operations After you ve turned on the KROME here s how to perform basic operations such as sele
217. n Hi RPPR Ch 62 RPPR NoAssign S 4 z rd f Drums Bass SyntH Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Track Play Loop Track Play Loop jg o o o g o 9 Loop Start Loop Start Measure Measure 985 809 Loop End_ _ ga8 Measure Play Intro Play Intro Loop End Measure If you play back from the first measure with the settings shown in the screenshot above the specified region of measures will repeat as follows Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 track o rf 9 10 9 10 9 iol 9 fro 9 ro 9 If Play Intro is unchecked the specified region of measures will repeat as follows Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Trackt 15 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 track o ro lolo 10 9 ole fro 9 rol 9 Recording Preparations for recording amp Before you begin recording make sure that the memory protect setting in Global mode is turned off For details please see Protecting the memory on page 110 Creating a Song Before we can begin this example we need to select an empty song where we can record 1 Press the SEQ button or MODE button to enter Sequencer mode 2 Choose Song Select e g in the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page You can press the Song Select popup button and choose from a list REC Resolution Tempo M
218. n Global P6 Changes you make to this data will be remembered as long as the power remains on but will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep your changes even after turning the power off you must write them into memory The following are exceptions Parameters that are not saved even if you Write e Effect Global SW Parameters that are saved even if you don t Write e Auto Power Off 1 Access the page that contains the parameters or settings that you want to save Choose one of the P0 P4 pages if you want to write global settings choose P5 if you want to write drum kits or choose P6 if you want to write arpeggio patterns 2 Press the WRITE button Alternatively press the page menu button in the upper right of the display and choose Write Global Setting Write Drum Kits or Write Arpeggio Patterns The corresponding one of the following dialog boxes will appear Write Global Setting dialog box PO P4 Write Global Setting Cancel OK Write Drum Kits dialog box P5 Cancel OK Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box P6 Cancel OK Cancel OK 3 To execute the Write command press the WRITE button Alternatively press the OK button in the Write dialog box If you decide not to execute press the EXIT button or the Cancel button Memory protect To prevent Programs Combinations Songs Drum Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns from being
219. n in Combination MOIE eee aarre hie N 98 Drum Track function settings sssess 100 Drum Track function settings in Program MOE sicasnsbawananineie EE E 100 Drum Track function settings in Combination MOdEceisurerdi ena EER 101 Drum Track function settings in Sequencer MOE eiior nere E AT EEA 101 Synchronizing the Drum Track function 102 Creating a Drum Track pattern 103 Using Drum Kits 0020005 105 Drum Kit OvervieW ccc cece cece cece teens 105 Before you Start editing 0c ccc eens 105 Editing a Drum Kit 0 ccc cc cece eee 106 Adjusting Global KROME setings 109 How Global mode is structured 109 Global settingS sessessessessessesoeo 109 BASIC SCLUD lt eeure re EE EAEE woos 109 MIDISGUINGS oened a aa T aara 111 Pedal and other controller settings 111 Creating user scales urcenie ccc ccc cece ce eee ees 112 Setting Category Names c eee eee eee 112 Loading amp saving data 113 Saving data oriris tepati enee 113 Saving data on the KROME 0000e 113 Writing to internal memory 0008 115 Editing NAMES cece aE AAE 117 Saving to SD card Media Save 118 Using the KROME as a data filer 119 Loading Cala viisiiss es eerwie dean eevee ee bweas 120 Data that can be loaded cc cece ee 120 Loading data fr
220. n the P8 Routing IFX Insert FX Setup page select the desired effect for IFX1 e Select MIDI Track 01 in Track Select Then press the SEQUENCER REC button and then the START STOP gt W button and record a phrase of about sixteen measures 2 Select Track 09 in Track Select and record parameter changes as desired Note For this example select an empty track If you want to record onto a MIDI track that already contains data set the PO Play REC Preferences page Recording Setup to Overdub as described on page 60 SEQ A Re Ek Tce VY G J 120 00 S000 NEW SONG EEE EENI T 1 A G KROME Grand Piano 10 11 p RPPR Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign le 1 Category gt 00 gt 60 gt 68 gt 00 gt 60 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 Keyboard J Keyboard Keyboard J Keyboard Keyboard J Keyboard j Keyboard Keyboard J Bank Program gt aooo gt aooo gt aooo gt aooo gt ABBO gt ABBB gt ABBA gt AQBO KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran ARP ARP Tone Prefe PlayLoop PlayLoop lt 7 6 A B Adjust rences 1 8 9 16 gt f Af gt gt f f gt e Select Track 09 in Track Select Then press the SEQUENCER REC button and then the START STOP gt Hf button and begin recording e At the appropriate time while recording adjust the parameter s that you want to realtime record In the
221. n this case the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing settings Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive must be checked respectively Recording Recording patterns Recording patterns Recording and editing patterns You can record patterns in either of two ways realtime recording or step recording However pattern realtime recording differs from song realtime recording in that you can use only Loop type recording You can edit patterns by using Event Edit operations to modify the recorded data or insert new data You can also use the Get From Track menu command to convert a desired region of performance data from a MIDI track into a pattern Conversely you can use the Put to Track or Copy to Track menu commands to place or copy the performance data from a pattern into a MIDI track In addition you can use the Convert to Drum Track Pattern page menu command to convert a user pattern to a drum track pattern See Converting to a Drum Track pattern on page 103 Recording patterns in real time When realtime recording a pattern a pattern of the specified number of measures will play back repeatedly allowing you to continue adding musical data to it 1 Create a new song and as described in Preparations for recording on page 57 set the track to the program that will be used by the pattern 2 Access the P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page REC Resolution Remove Data Pattern Select SEQ HOAS Patt
222. n use keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between normal playing and arpeggiated playing or to switch between arpeggiators A and B step 8 e Make settings for timbres that will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off and will sound only when the arpeggiator is On step 10 89 90 Arpeggiator function Arpeggjiator settings 1 Select Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use For this example select any desired program for timbres 1 4 2 Select Combi P3 Timbre Parameters MIDI T01 08 page For the timbres that you will be using set Status to INT and set MIDI Channel to Gch or to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 MIDI Basic MIDI Channel For this example set timbres 1 4 to a Status of INT and timbres 5 8 to a Status of Off Set the MIDI Channel of timbres 1 4 to Gch COMBI AAEN tE line DOGO InitCombi DOGA T 1 A013 Deep Soul Lead Ch Gch LeadSynth MotionSynt Bass Synth Strings Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Status ONON Ont Ont Oof Qof Qof Oot MIDI Channel Gch Gch Gch Gch 05 06 07 08 AMR LCIRI VY IG J 120 00 Bank Select When Status EX2 3 Select Combi P7 ARP DT ARP Setup T01 08 page COMB A DOBO InitCombi DOO ARP Setup T801 08 v o O J 120 00 T 3 A011 MG Funk Bass Ch Gch LeadSynth MotionSynt Bass Synth Strings Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard p re eggiator Assign Oa OA O Oof Oof
223. n you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the menu If instead you press the Cancel button your selection will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected when you opened the popup menu 23 24 Playing and editing Programs Program information In the Prog P0 Play Main page you can view the following information about the selected program OSC Picture This is a graphic that represents the program s oscillator OSC Oct For a double oscillator or double drums this indicates Oct the basic pitch of the oscillator SW1 SW2 This indicates the function that s assigned to the SW1 SW2 buttons and the on off state of the buttons Realtime Controls TONE CONTROLS USER CONTROLS ARP CONTROLS This shows information about the functions of the REALTIME CONTROLS knob that s currently selected Use the SELECT button to choose the functions that will be controlled by the knobs For more information about these functions please see page 28 EQ Low Mid Hz Mid High This shows the 3 band EQ settings You can use the value controllers to edit the values Effect Controls IFX MFX TEX This shows the effects that are assigned The KROME provides insert effects 1 5 master effects 1 and 2 anda total effect For the master effects you can edit the return levels Velocity Meter This meter shows the note on velocity value The meter shows the
224. nation Get From Track This command takes musical data from a MIDI track and loads it into the specified pattern Put To Track This command places a pattern into a MIDI track Copy To Track This command copies the specified area of musical data from the specified pattern to a MIDI track as musical data Convert to Drum Track Pattern This command converts a user pattern into a user drum track pattern which can then be used with the Drum Track in any mode Load Drum Track Pattern This command loads a user Drum Track pattern into a user pattern Erase Drum Track Pattern This erases the specified Drum Track pattern Location bar Track name indication Note events Control message name indication gt Track View Setup Track view edit Here we ll explain track view editing You can visually specify regions of measures in the display and then move copy or erase them For each track event data such as notes velocities and control changes are displayed see the illustration below Your editing will apply to the highlighted measures The range is shown in FROM MEASURE and To END of MEASURE in the upper line You can move copy or erase data in units of measures Note You can t specify a region of measures unless a tool is selected in the toolbox Examples of using the tools Example Moving the events of measures 1 2 to measures 5 6 1 Press the N tool 2 Drag over measures 1 2 to specif
225. nch TFT WVGA 800x480 dots adjustable play brightness MODE Buttons COMBI PROG SEQ GLOBAL MEDIA VALUE Dial INC DEC buttons 10 key numeric keypad button button ENTER Value Controllers button COMPARE butt User Interface ube Huen BANK Buttons A F used for Combination A B C D SEQUENCER Buttons PAUSE I REW 44 FF gt gt LOCATE I REC START STOP gt E TEMPO TEMPO Knob TAP button Other WRITE button PAGE button EXIT button VOLUME knob 1 4 TS Mono unbalanced Volume knob controls AUDIO OUTPUT Output Impedance 1 1kQ2 stereo 550Q mono L Mono only L MONO R Maximum Level 16 0 dBu Audio Outputs Analog Load Impedance 10 KQ or greater 1 8 TRS Stereo Volume knob 1 USB TYPE B MIDI interface SB Capacity recognized SD memory cards up to 2 Gigabytes GB SDHC memory cards up to 32 Gigabytes GB SD Card slot SDXC memory cards are not supported AC adapter power supply connector DC 12V lt Power On Off switch a 1 027 x 313 x 93 mm 40 43 x 12 32 x 3 66 eo 1 191 x 313 x 93 mm 46 89 x 12 32 x 3 66 1 448 x 383 x 131 mm 57 01 x 15 08 x 5 16 Power Consumption 13W KROME 88 Accessories AC adapter Quick Start guide Accessory Disc KROME Parameter Guide PDF Operation guide PDF Video manual etc XVP 10 Expression Volume Pedal EXP 2 Foot Controller Options DS 1H Damper Pedal Pedal Switch Controllers Operating requirements KORG US
226. nction will be reset If the same specified length of time elapses with no user input the same message will appear again Connections Turning the power off Connections amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless usage may damage your speaker system or cause malfunctions Connections to computers Pedal connections etc ASSIGNABLE PEDAL ASSIGNABLE SWITCH rae J DAMPER z om ain nn ain ill USB S2 OUT MIDI IN DAMPER SWITCH PEDAL R L MONO 0 D ASSIGNABLE AUDIO OUTPUT ef gt MIDI OUT MIDIIN i i AUDIO OUTPUT 7 7 RL MONO AC adapter power supply connector MIDIIN mipi our Connections to MIDI equipment i t P bl ower cable i E Included Le to an AC outlet Connecting the AC adapter MIDI keyboard Powered monitors etc Analog audio output 17 18 Setup Audio connections The KROME does not contain built in speakers In order to hear the sound of your performance you ll need to connect audio equipment such as powered monitors a mixer a stereo set or headphones Connecting audio equipment amp The KROME s audio output is designed to produce a signal level that is higher than consumer audio equipment such as CD players For this reason performing at high a volume may damage your speakers or equipment Please use caution when adjusting the volume 1 Minimize the volu
227. nd Selecting an arpeggio pattern and specifying its function move the controllers or modify the parameters to change the way that the arpeggios are played Arpeggiator on off e Each time you press the ARP button the arpeggiator will be switched on off When the arpeggiator is turned on the LED will light up and the selected arpeggio pattern will begin when you play the keyboard ARP O J Note The on off status is saved when you write each program amp In Combination and Song modes the arpeggios may not start when you press the ARP button depending on the saved settings You may need to play a keyboard see page 90 Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo e Rotate the TEMPO knob or TAP button O to adjust the tempo TEMPO The J display in the upper right of a the LCD will change The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 40 00 300 00 bpm The LED will blink in time with 40 300 the specified tempo As an alternative to using the TEMPO _TAP knob or TAP button you can also setthe tempo by selecting in the display using the numeric keys 0 9 to enter the tempo and pressing the ENTER button You can also set the tempo by using the VALUE controllers The LED will blink in synchronization with the tempo you specify 5 Note The tempo setting is also saved when you write a program Note The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the Reso setting Prog P0 Play Arpeggiator p
228. nd generator as well as for external MIDI sound modules amp When you turn off the power the settings created in Sequencer mode the song data any user pattern data and Cue List that you recorded will not be backed up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on an SD card before turning off the power or perform a MIDI data dump to save the data on an external data filer etc If you wish to write the programs track parameters effects and arpeggiator settings etc selected for a song as a template song use the menu command Save Template Song Immediately after the power is turned on KROME will not contain any song data so if you wish to play a song on the sequencer you must first load data from SD card or receive a MIDI data dump from a MIDI filer For details please see page 118 and page 219 of the Parameter Guide Sequencer mode structure Sequencer mode is structured as follows Songs A song consists of tracks 1 16 a master track song parameters such as the song name arpeggiator Drum Track function effect and RPPR parameters and 100 user patterns A maximum of 128 such songs can be created on KROME Tracks 1 16 consist of setup parameters such as each track s program pan and volume located at the start of the song and the musical data itself The master track consists of tempo and time signature data see Setup parameters amp Musical data on page 106 of the Parameter Guide
229. nd make your selection The selection method is the same as in Selecting by Bank Program Select menu on page 22 Refer to that page for details Bank Combination Select menu Bank Combination Select Fan A000 Piano amp Strings AQQ8 Fusion Split ae A Q1 Bossa Rose SW1 2 A009 Enigmatic Cello Bank C A002 Wurly Time A010 Pad amp Dist Guitar pank A 03 Bass amp Piano A 11 Dyno Orchestra A004 Lonely Moon A012 Rhythm amp Bows A005 Boom Pow Pad A013 Planet Pad A 6 Organ Groove SW1 2 A 14 Ambi Core A007 Mods VOX Organ 1 SW1 2 A015 Tempo Pad Si Find Cancel Playing combinations Using controllers to modify the sound Selecting by Category Combination Select menu You can select Combinations arranged by category such as keyboard organ bass and drums When shipped from the factory the preloaded Combinations are organized into 16 categories each with several sub categories e Press the Category Select popup button to access the menu and make your selection The selection method is the same as in Selecting by Category Program Select menu on page 23 refer to that page for details Category Combination Select menu Category Combination Select Keyboard Keuboard RCCR PGE aS ante A021 Rock Piano Strings anal Organ AQQ1 Bossa Rose SW1 2 AQ22 Piano Strings Suh Bcl Malle AQG2 Wurly Time AQ23 CompPiano amp Tron Str Vox Leagsplit String
230. nob 4 STEP to the center position 12 o clock so that the values of the Length and Resolution parameters Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page will be used Note For the preload arpeggio patterns U0000 INT U0899 INT simply changing the Length can significantly change the character of the pattern Try changing the length and listening to the result See Length Pattern Length on page 211 of the Parameter Guide 7 Make settings for the J Tempo Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard parameters These are program parameters but they can be set from here as well G amp If after accessing this page from Program mode you modify these parameters and wish to keep your changes return to Program mode and write the program These parameters are not saved by Write Arpeggio Pattern For this example make the settings shown display step J 8 In Arpeggio Pattern Setup specify how the arpeggio will be developed 9 Press the ql button to select Edit dialog U1000 USER Length 08 view E J 120 00 5 1 g 17 2s E Overview i S af 2em Scroll 7 1 5S 13 Resoltion S ee oo 12 9 47 Tone Input 06 gt Step 01 5 04 Pitch 00 03 Touch Grid o2 Gate 050 01 oa Velocity 064 Ei Parameter Flam 00 View Cancel OK A pattern consists of Steps and Tones
231. ntHi 00 HiTop 00 Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity 88 AMS JS Y CC 02 Intensity LFO1 Intensity 00 AMS JS Y CC 02 LFO2 Intensity 00 AMS JS Y CC 02 Ampt Amp2 Amp2 Driverl l od J Driver2 A Mod The basic volume level is set by the Amp Level parameter You can then alter this using the modulation sources below Intensity 00 Intensity 00 Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume relative to the note you play For details please see Keyboard Track on page 39 Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the volume of strongly played notes and the Amp Modulation parameter adjusts the depth of this control Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volume difference between softly played and strongly played notes LFO1 2 Specifies how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s where you set an LFO1 Intensity LFO2 Intensity value Intensity AMS Intensity adjusts the depth of how the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you assign an AMS LFO1 AMS LFO2 AMS For example if you set AMS to JS Y CC 02 tremolo will be applied when you push the KROME s joystick down toward yourself or when CC 02 is received Detailed Editing with Prog
232. o be connected in series to the master effects at the send levels specified by Send 1 to MFX1 and Send 2 to MFX2 3 OSC MFX Send specifies the send level from each oscillator to the master effects This can be set only when Bus IFX Output Select is either L R or Off If Bus IFX Output Select is set to IFX1 5 the send level to the master effects is set by Send1 and Send2 Insert FX Setup page after the signal passes through the insert effects 4 FX Control Bus sends the output of oscillator 1 and 2 to the FX Control bus Use this if you want the audio input to the effect to be controlled by a different sound You can use the two FX Control buses to control effects freely For details please see FX Control Buses on page 238 of the Parameter Guide Routing effect settings Program Effects settings Insert effects 5 Access the Prog P8 Routing IFX Insert FX Setup page PROG RATEI MAREA VY G Insert Effect Chain To Chain Pan 8 Bus Sel FX Ctrl 1 1 Senda on IFX2 1 gt 2 rw IFx3 883 Stereo Limiter 3 on IFX4 38 Stereo Flanger 4 oD 00 No Effect 5 ow 883 Stereo Limiter An A L An amp 6 Choose the effect type that you want to use for each insert effect IFX1 5 When you press the popup button all effects will be displayed organized into ten categories Use the pages located to the left and right to select a category and choose an effect from the desire
233. o find the previous or next program This will cycle through the found items within the tab You can play the keyboard to audition the program that was found If no items are found the display will indicate nothing 7 If you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the menu The selected program will be selected in the menu you selected in step 1 If you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the menu If you want to search for a different program or if no items were found press the Cancel button 8 Press the tab that you want to select next and search as described in steps 3 7 If you press the Cancel button this selection will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected prior to opening the menu Selecting by Category Program Select menu You can select Programs from within a category such as keyboard organ bass and drums When shipped from the factory the preloaded Programs are organized into 16 categories each with several sub categories 1 Press the Category Select popup button The Category Program Select menu appears Category Program Select menu Category Program Select 88 Keyboard aaa T a KROME Warm Piano SlowSynt Organ A001 E Piano Mark R amp B Kn3 A023 KROME Dark Grand TE Bell Malle AQ 2 E P Mark V Distotion A024 Singer Grand Piano ie JIE A003 E Piano Dyno Chorus A025 Live Stage Grand en TER
234. o secure the cable of the included AC adapter After connecting the AC adapter loop the cable around the hook located on the KROME s rear panel so that the cable won t get pulled out inadvertently Leave enough slack on the plug end so that you can disconnect it if you want to See page 15 amp Be careful not to bend the base of the plug any more than necessary 2 AUDIO OUTPUTS AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO amp R jack These are the stereo audio outputs Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the volume See page 17 3 PEDALS You can connect a damper pedal foot switch and foot pedal to these jacks This gives you a broader range of functions and effects to control See page 18 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack DAMPER jack 4 MIDI MIDI lets you connect the KROME to a computer or other MIDI devices for sending and receiving notes controller gestures sound settings and so on See page 20 MIDI IN connector MIDI OUT connector 5 SD SD card slot You can insert an SD card here and use it to save load KROME programs combinations or song data See page 118 6 USB USB connector for connecting to computer You can connect your computer to this connector Using a single USB cable your KROME can send and receive MIDI information directly to and from a computer without requiring a MIDI interface See page 20 Note The USB connector of the KROME is only able to transmit and receive MIDI data
235. o select a combination 2 COMBI PO Play 1 Mode name button S ont v 3 Combination Select 4 Numeric keypads 5 BANK SELECT ENTER button 1 COMBI button A F buttons 4 INC DEC buttons BANK Category DEC INC 7 8 9 WRITE A B s een a COMBI CJ S EJ Bank Progra m C fe avoee Opai7 Oee23 Oaess Cass Oaoss e105 Oci4 4 o N 5 2L E a TEMPO KROME Gran Legato Strir Sine Lead 90 s Piano 90 s Piano 90 s Piano Tekno Klub k TRI Bass 2 PROG S Lf jj 120 D He N ee E e ag SEQUENCER 1 2 3 COMPARE lt gt gt i Adjust o ENTER C__J I lt e gt m TAP C37 Co C3 EJ G EXIT PAGE El TouchView 4 VALUE dial 43 44 Playing and editing Combinations e Use the INC or DEC buttons e Turn the VALUE dial e Use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the combination number and press the ENTER button 5 Press a COMBI BANK A D button to switch banks When you select a different Bank the button s LED will light up and the selected bank will appear on the left side of the display For example to select bank B press the COMBI BANK B button The B button will light up and the name Bank B will appear in the left side of the display Auditioning the sound Play the KROME s keyboard to hear the co
236. ob Mod 2 IFX1 St Graphic 7EQ 2 St Exciter Enhner 3 No Effect 4 No Effect 5 No Effect 3 Knob Mod 3 4 Knob Mod 4 2 10k Msn Blas RETURN gt 1 Stereo Chorus S BEeeore 03 5 020 035 WIR See eisai a8 SW2 I Octave Up Mixer Tone amp Drum Adjust SW1 HJ Octave Down 2 Press the DRUM TRACK button The ON OFF button will light up or blink depending on the setting Trigger Mode of the program If lit The Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting When you turn it off the pattern will stop This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Start Immediately If blinking The Drum Track pattern will be ready to start It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI note on is received This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is set to Wait KBD Trigger Adjusting the performance tempo e You can use the TEMPO knob or the O TAP button to adjust the performance TEMPO tempo 120 This will change the J value located on the upper right side of the display You can adjust the tempo with a range of 40 00 300 00 bpm The LED located 40 300 above the TAP button will blink at inter TAP vals of a quarter note J C You can also adjust the tempo by choos ing J in the display Use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the tempo and then press the ENTER button You can also use the VALUE controller to set the tempo The LED will blink at t
237. ob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob Mod 3 CC 20 and Knob Mod 4 CC 21 respectively Here s an example of how to set up knob 1 to control a Program s filter and amp EG attack time 1 Press the MODE PROG button to enter Program mode 2 Access the P1 Basic Controllers Controllers Setup page Press the PAGE button to access Page Select and choose P1 Basic Controllers Press the Controllers tab 3 Press the Realtime Controls Knob Assign Knob 1 B popup button and choose F A Attack CC 73 4 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL button to select USER The LED USER will light up 5 Use knob 1 to control the EG attack for the filter and amp For details please see page 348 of the Parameter Guide Note If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save the Program Combination or Song see page 116 Arpeggiator settings According to the note data received from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator will automatically generate a wide range of phrases or patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns When the realtime controls ARP is selected you can use the knobs to vary the duration and dynamics of the arpeggiated notes For more about the arpeggiator please see page 85 Drum Track settings You can use the KROME s rich variety of drum patterns to accompany you with
238. obal MIDI Channel 1 Go to the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page 2 In the MIDI Setup section set the MIDI Channel as desired MIDI Clock synchronization The KROME can use its own internal tempo or synchronize to external clocks from either MIDI or USB The best general purpose setting is Auto This combine the functionality of Internal and External MIDI USB so that you don t have to manually switch between the two e If external clocks are being received they control the KROME tempo e If external clocks are not being received the KROME uses its internal tempo instead Synchronizing to a USB connected computer If you want to synchronize the KROME s tempo to a computer connected via USB 1 Go to the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page 2 In the MIDI Setup section set the MIDI Clock to Auto Pedal and other controller settings In the Global mode P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page you can assign the functions of the assignable buttons and assignable pedals See Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal on page 18 GLOBAL ARAA L te Iie Foot Switch amp Pedal Damper Foot Switch Assign eee VY iG o off KORG Standard KORG Standard Assignable button and Assignable Pedal settings Foot Pedal Assign Damper Polarity Foot Switch Polarity 111 112 Adjusting Global KROME setings Creating user scales The
239. of different channels such as when recording the output of the drum track arpeggiator or RPPR functions or when recording from an external multi track sequencer An example of realtime recording In this example we ll assign a drum program to track 01 and create the following one measure drum phrase Hi hat F 3 Snare E3 C Bass drum C3 gt TE 7 y ED 1 Create a new song and specify a drum program for track 01 Use Track Select to select track 01 and verify that you hear a drum program See page 57 2 Access the P0 Play REC Preferences page In Recording Setup specify Loop All Tracks and set it to M001 M001 see page 117 of the Parameter Guide With this setting measure 1 will be recorded repeatedly The newly recorded data will be added at each pass 3 Set REC Resolution to J See page 58 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC button and then the START STOP gt W button The metronome will sound a two measure count down and then recording will begin 5 As shown in the musical example printed above start by playing the C3 note of the keyboard to record the bass drum for one measure 6 Next play the E3 note of the keyboard to record the snare for one measure and then the F 3 note to record the hi hat 7 Press the START STOP gt W button to stop recording 8 Play back the result and listen to the drum performance that you recorded Pres
240. of each program but effect presets allow you to save and recall your favorite parameter settings for each effect If you ve come up with an effect setting you like use the menu command Write FX Preset to save it as a preset so that you can easily recall it in a different program or mode For details on the parameters of each effect see page 251 and following in the Parameter Guide Double size effects Double size effects 172 St Mltband Limiter 193 Early Reflections use twice as much space as other effects You can use double size effects for insert effects IFX1 IFX4 and master effect MFX1 However because it takes up two units of effects power the next numbered effect will be unavailable For example if you ve selected a double size effect for IFX1 you won t be able to use IFX2 If you ve selected a double size effect for MFX1 you won t be able to use MFX2 An example of when a double size effect is selected for IFX1 and IFX4 PROG Insert Effect P8 Routing IFX maaan VY G Chain To Chain Pan 8 Bus Sel FX Ctrl Send Senda IFX3 173 PianoBody Damper Master effects 11 The input levels to the master effects are set by the Send 1 2 levels step 3 or 9 If Send 1 2 are zero the master effects will not apply Send 1 corresponds to MFX1 and Send 2 corresponds to MFX2 12 Access the Prog P9 MFX TFX LFO Routing page T v G P9 MFX TFX LFO MEX M ae Send1 Q
241. ogram or in the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 and T09 16 pages to mute unmute a combination A combination does not play correctly after you load data In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check the items that you wanted to save gt PG p 231 Are the bank numbers of the programs used by the combination the same as when the combination was created e If you have switched program banks you can use the Global mode Change all bank references menu command to change the program bank for each timbre of a combination gt PG p 216 Can t write a Program Is the Memory Protect Program or Combination checkbox Global P0 cleared gt p 110 and PG p 197 127 128 Appendices Songs Song does not play correctly after being loaded In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check all of the items that you wanted to save gt PG p 231 Are the programs used by the song the same as when the song was created e If you have switched program banks you can use the Global mode Change all bank references menu command to change the program bank for each track of a song gt PG p 216 e When saving the song it is best to use Save All PCG amp SNG so that the programs are saved together with the song Then when loading load both the PCG and the SEQ data gt PG p 231 Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt E button in Sequencer mode Is the MIDI Clock Global P
242. ogram mode Return Master Effect 1 2 OUTPUT Total Effect L MONO R Combination and Sequencer modes Ret Master Effect 1 2 ome OUTPUT Timbre 1 MIDI Track 1 Insert Effect 1 5 Total Effect L MONO R Timbre 16 MIDI Track 16 78 Routing effect settings The insert effects master effects and total effect have the same structure in all modes but the routing settings will determine how the oscillators of a program or the timbres of a combination or track of a song will be sent to each insert effect master effect or total effect In the pages that follow we will explain how you can adjust routing settings and effect settings in each mode Program Effects settings Routing 1 Access the Prog P8 Routing IFX Routing page PROG DERZIKU ale Routing Y IG Elfed Stereo Chorus Esta Stereo Limiter p EI Stereo Flanger 4 No Effect S Gi Stereo Limiter S Bus Select All OSCs to Bus IFX Output Select R4 FX Control Bus off gag OSC MFX Send bw IFX f f Aa A f A 2 Use Bus IFX Output Select to specify the bus where the oscillator output will be sent If you want the oscillator output to be input to insert effect 1 choose IFX1 L R The output will not be sent to the total effect After bypassing the total effect the sound will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R IFX1 5 The output will be sent to insert effect IFX 1 5 Off Choose this if you want the signal t
243. om SD card Media Load 120 Media Utility osessssssscsssessoessoeoo 123 Formatting media ccc cece cece eee ees 123 Setting the current tiMe ccc eee eee 123 Appendices ceccccececseves 125 Restoring the factory settings 125 Loading the preloaded data 5 125 IVICA ZATION 4 5 5 5 36 56 5256 Week shoe a a EEA 125 Troubleshooting cccecececccccccecs 126 Power supply scsceicenesnesdasncona eye deb eec eas 126 DISDIAY E E E E E TE E EEE 126 AUGIO CUT UU dire acsian cians iainaaes arei 126 Programs and Combinations 08 127 DOINGS ea st EE teams 128 MIDECOGIGUOR 23 9 50 na reina a A T rane sees 128 Drum Track function cc cece eee ee eee 128 PUMA KIS cts Geis Sno eevee pate ecstacy aid lo doe eee 128 BVOC Sit ouch tebe aiaih dee hie eating TE 129 WN 22 3 6 ashe oe eae a ead rule educa ea 129 DaMmpPerpeCal acssa acid eee aa 129 Medi Pu sranta by tid Satter Ridetet ind eed ieee 129 Connections with a computer 006 129 Error messages 65h 65558 oS Soe dk eee ae ee es 130 Error and confirmation messages 130 Specifications sins c50525is sto ure 134 Operating requirements 0c cece eee eee 135 MIDI Implementation Chart 136 Introduction to the KROME Front and rear panels Front panel
244. om those associated with the individual Programs in Program mode if desired In addition you can make arpeggiator and drum track settings on the P7 ART DT page and controller settings on the P1 Controllers page to create the finished Combination Soloing timbres You can use the Control Surface s Solo function to hear the sound of each timbre by itself For details please see Solo On Off on page 72 of the Parameter Guide Restoring edited settings Using COMPARE When you re in the process of editing a sound pressing the COMPARE button will recall the saved version of the sound as it was before you started editing For details please see Compare function on page 11 Layers Splits and Velocity Switches Within a Combination you can use note range and velocity level to define the zone in which a specific timbre will play The Programs assigned to each Timbre can be played in three ways as part of a layer a split or a velocity switch A Combination can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods simultaneously Layer Layers cause two or more Programs to play simultaneously when a note is played WAM e Split Splits cause different Programs to respond on different areas of the keyboard Mi Velocity Switch Velocity Switches cause different Programs to respond depending on the velocity how hard you play the notes Split Differ
245. on if you start the arpeggiator by pressing a key during the pre count before recording begins the arpeggiator will start its pattern as soon as recording begins and will be recorded Synchronization with external sequencer playback If J Tempo is EXT i e if Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock is External MIDI or External USB in Program Combination or Sequencer modes the arpeggiator will synchronize to the MIDI timing Clock and Start messages received from a connected MIDI device Note Synchronization will occur in the same way if MIDI timing Clock is Auto and MIDI realtime clock messages are being received from a connected MIDI device Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo timing of the external MIDI timing clock Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages If the arpeggiator is turned on and running an incoming MIDI realtime Start message will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning of its pattern This is unaffected by the Key Sync setting Drum Track function Performing with the Drum Track function The Drum Track function makes it easy to play the KROME s high quality drum programs using a wide variety of Drum Track patterns It provides a convenient way for you to hear Drum Track patterns while you try out various phrases on a program or combination or work out the outline of your song Then when you ve come up with some ideas you
246. on or source track Open pattern Meaning A pattern has been placed in the track that you specified as a destination or source for editing If you wish to open the pattern and execute the events of the pattern will be copied press the OK button If you wish to execute without opening the pattern press the Cancel button Pattern used in song Continue Meaning When editing the specified pattern has been placed in a track If you wish to execute press the OK button If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button R Root directory is full Meaning When attempting to create a file or directory at the root level of the media you exceeded the maximum number of files or folder that could be created in the root directory of that media e Either delete an existing file or directory or Open a directory to move down one level before creating a file or directory S Selected file path is not correct Meaning When loading a divided PCG file you attempted to load a PCG file of the same name that was not divided or had differing contents e Load the correct PCG file Source is empty Meaning No data exists in the track or pattern that you specified as the source e Specify a track or pattern that contains musical data Meaning This message will appear when you execute Swap Insert Effect if one of the effects to be swapped Sourcel or Source2 is a double size effect and is therefore an unusabl
247. ontrollers apply change to the basic program Take a look at the illustration Program structure Notice that the signal flow is in the order of Oscillator Pitch Filter Amp You can see how the EGs and LFOs affect each section As shown in the illustration each program consists of sections such as OSC 1 2 effects and the arpeggiator Program structure Program Basic Controllers P1 Common LFO P5 10 OSC1 LFO1 P5 1 OSC1 LFO2 P5 2 OSC1 Setup P2 1 OSC1 Velocity P2 2 Filter1 A B P3 1 Amp1 Driver1 P4 1 Amp1 Mod P4 2 Filter Key Track P3 2 OSC1 Pitch P2 3 Filter Mod P3 3 Filter LFO Mod P3 4 Filter1 EG P3 10 Amp 1 EG P4 3 OSC1 AMS Mix P6 1 2 Osc 1 OSC 2 Pitch EG P2 10 Common KeyTrack P6 9 10 OSC oscillator 1 2 The OSC oscillator generates the waveform that is the basis of the sound On the KROME the oscillator consists of multiple sampled sounds such as a multisample or a drum kit drumsamples The KROME provides two oscillators OSC1 and OSC2 You can create more complex programs by combining these The OSC which is the basis of the sound can be controlled by modulating its pitch filter amp EG and LFO to change the sound in a wide range of ways
248. opened and the popup menu will close immediately when you press a parameter value j Popup button 2 When you press this button a tabbed menu will appear To close a tabbed menu press the OK button or Cancel button Scroll bar Use this when you need to see parameter values that extend beyond what can be shown in the display at one time i Press here to scroll to left or right Press here to scroll to the corresponding location Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location k Menu command button Menu When this button is pressed a list of menu commands will appear The menu commands that appear will differ depending on the selected page You can also select up to ten menu commands by holding down the ENTER button and pressing a numeric key 0 9 The menu will close when you press the display in a location other than the menu or when you press the EXIT button V ai Menu command button lt gt Write Combination Exclusive Solo Auto Song Setup Copy from Program Copy Tone Adjust Reset Tone Adjust Menu button Dialog box When you select a menu command you ll see a screen containing the settings needed to execute the command This is called a dialog box The dialog box that appears will depend on the menu command that you select Some commands such as Exclusive Solo do not display a dialog box Text edit button Write Comb AOOO T Piano amp St
249. or have separate FX Send amounts For instance you can send a snare sound through a dedicated compressor You can use Drum Kits only in Programs whose Oscillator Mode is set to Single or Double Drums Drum Kit memory structure The KROME has over 161 Drum Kits divided into Internal User and GM General MIDI groups as shown below You can edit or write into any of the locations except for the GM bank which cannot be erased Drum Kit contents em o j o 00 31 Preload Drum Kits 48 56 GM2 Drum Kits The 9 Drum Kits in the GM bank are compatible with the GM2 sound map The other Drum Kits may use different mappings where appropriate Using a drum kit in a program Oscillator Mode In the Program P1 Basic Ctrls Program Basic page set the Oscillator Mode parameter to Drums or Double Drums Then for the oscillator select the drum kit that you want to use Before you start editing Selecting a drum program Drum Kits are edited in Global Mode While you re in Global Mode you ll play the kit that you re editing as if you were playing it from within the Program Combi or Song which was selected before you entered Global mode So before you enter Global mode it s best to select a Program which is already set up for drums with the appropriate EG settings effects and so on Just use the Program Category select popup and choose a drum Program such as Studio Standard Kit amp Even if the p
250. ositive value For even numbered steps set Flam to a negative value U1662 USER Length 08 1 g J 109 00 lt H 5 js 7 F ef ol4 gt Step 01 Pitch 00 Gate Velocity 064 Flam 00 Cancel OK Drum pattern You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by using Fixed Note with a drum program 1 In Program mode select a drum kit program For this example select the preset program A017 Jazz Dry Amb 1 Kit Category Drums 2 In Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern select the Setup page and parameter settings Arpeggio Tone Mode Set this to Fixed Note This will cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch Fixed Note Mode If you set this to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will sound all tones If you set this to Trigger As Played the tones will be sounded according to the notes you play on the keyboard see page 212 of the Parameter Guide Tay v IG J 109 06 Length 8 GLOBAL AMR leh Tele LA Arpeggiator Select U1003 USER aj _ Key Sync m Latch m Keyboard Octave 1 C Sort Resolution 3 Arpeggio Pattern Setup Arpeggio Tone Mode O Normal Fixed Note Setup Arpeggio Type As Played Octave Motion Up Fixed Note Mode MALCOR JIELIGE 3 Select the Edit page U1003 USER Length 08 VIEW 48 J 109 00 1 g 41 ror Sj Ole jees i F lePol 4 gt
251. ot start Is the ARP button turned on lit gt p 85 If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination or song make sure that Arpeggiator Run is checked and that an arpeggiator is selected for Assign gt p 88 and PG p 74 p 92 p 114 If the arpeggiator does not run in the Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern page could you have navigated there from Combination or Sequencer mode with settings that do not start the arpeggiator Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal gt PG p 199 In the Global PO Basic Setup page is All ARP DT Off checked gt PG p 195 Drum Track function The Drum Track does not start Is the DRUM TRACK button turned on lit gt p 97 You pressed the DRUM TRACK button but the drum track pattern did not start e Is the DRUM TRACK button blinking Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger The drum track pattern will start when you play the keyboard or receive a note on gt PG p 56 e Did you select a pattern that does not contain data e Could P000 Off be selected as the pattern gt PG p 55 If the drum track pattern fails to start in Combination mode is the Output setting appropriate If the drum track pattern fails to start in Sequencer mode are the Input and Output settings appropriate gt p 99 and PG p 146 Is MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto gt PG p 199 In the Global P0 Basic Setup page is All ARP DT Off checked gt PG p 195 Drum
252. our changes will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this modified data into internal memory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program or combination number of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing your edits the data of the newly selected program or combination will overwrite the edited data in the edit buffer and your changes will be lost Note When you press the COMPARE button in Program mode or Combination mode the data from memory i e the contents that were written into memory will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you are editing with the original un edited settings Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer When you write the lt Edit Edit Buffer program or combination When you select a program settings will be saved in or combination its data is internal memory Write Select called from internal memory into the edit buffer Internal Memory Combination A 0 127 a Nj Writing saving procedure The Program and Combination settings you ve made in the various editing pages can be saved to internal memory This action is referred to as writing a program or writing a Combination If you wan
253. overwritten accidentally the KROME provides a Memory Protect setting that prohibits writing to memory Before you save edited data or load data from media use the following procedure to turn the memory protect off uncheck the appropriate check box You must also turn memory protect off before loading the above data from media or via a MIDI data dump or before recording in Sequencer mode 1 Press the GLOBAL button to enter Global mode 2 Access the Global P0 Basic Setup System Preferences page GLOBAL AA R TELLERIA System Preferences V iG E System Preferences Bank Map Ket Power On Mode Reset Auto Power Off 4 hours m Beep Enable m Value Edit Pop up m Animation m a e Pop up S Memory Protect _ Program Drum Kit _ Combination _ ARP User Pattern _ Song 3 Press the Memory Protect check box for the type of data you wish to write to internal memory so that the box is unchecked Saving data Editing names Editing names You can modify the name of an edited program combination song drum kit or user arpeggio patterns etc You can also modify the category names for programs and combinations These renaming procedures can be performed in the following pages oo ltem Page roarai Prog PO 9 menu command g Write Program es Combi PO 9 menu command Combination a Write Combination Seq PO 5 menu command Song Rename Song Pattern Seq P10
254. oward the right will make the notes stronger When the knob is in the center position 12 o clock the value of the pro gram parameter Velocity Prog P7 ARP DT Arp Setup page will be used Note The state of the knob is saved when you write the program Note It is effective to use the SELECT button to select TONE and then adjust knobs 1 CUTOFF 2 RESONANCE and 3 EG INT Adding a shuffle feel to the arpeggio pattern e If you turn knob 3 the timing of the arpeggiated notes on even numbered beats will be shifted forward or backward Turning the knob toward the left will speed up the timing of the even numbered beats When the knob is in the center position 12 o clock the timing will be as specified by the program parameter Swing Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page Changing the number of steps in the arpeggio pattern e By turning knob 4 STEP you can change the number of steps in the arpeggio pattern Turning the knob toward the left will shorten the pattern length Length by half Turning the knob toward the right will shorten the interval of the arpeggiated notes Resolution by half When the knob is in the center position 12 o clock the pat tern will be as specified by the parameters Length and Resolution Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page G amp If the arpeggio pattern selected by Pat Pattern Select is one of the preset arpeggio patterns P0 P4 turning the knob
255. pe of timbre 1 to 12 and set the Top Slope of timbre 2 to 12 the sound will change gradually instead of changing suddenly Creating Velocity Switches Next let s create a simple velocity switched Combination like the diagram below r 127 1 switch 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page 2 Select a brass sound for Timbre 1 and a strings sound for Timbre 2 3 Access the P3 Timbre Parameters MIDI T01 08 page 4 For Timbres 1 and 2 set Status to INT and MIDI Channel to Gch the Global Channel 5 Access the P4 Zone Delay Vel Z T01 08 page 6 Set Timbre 1 s Top Velocity to 127 and its Bottom Velocity to 64 You can also enter a velocity value by selecting the parameter and then playing a note with the desired velocity on the keyboard while holding down the ENTER button COMBI MEADE Il AOOO Piano amp Strings T 2 A000 KROME Grand Piano Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Top Velocity 127 863 127 127 127 127 127 127 Top Slope aa 00 aa 00 aa Bottom Slope 0a 00 217 217 217 217 217 Bottom Yelocity 001 001 001 001 001 00i EE e 7 Set Timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63 and a Bottom Velocity of 1 Velocity Zone Slope Similar to Key Zone Slopes as described above these let you fade in and fade out sounds gradually over a velocity range instead of a simple hard switch In the case of the example abo
256. pear m Load NEWFILE SNG too Select SNG Allocation Append Clear Cancel OK 5 If you want to load song data at the same time select the Load SNG too box When you execute the load operation the SNG file will be loaded together with the PCG file Use Select SNG Allocation to specify the destination to which the song data will be loaded Append will load the song into the song number that follows the song s currently existing in internal memory without leaving a vacant number Clear will erase all songs from internal memory and load the songs into the numbers from which they were saved 6 Press the OK button All data from the PCG file will be loaded into the KROME amp Never remove the media while data is being loaded Note You can load individual banks of programs or combinations For details please see page 228 and following of the Parameter Guide Loading individual data from a PCG file The KROME lets you load Programs Combinations Drum kits user Drum Kit patterns User Arpeggio patterns individually or by individual banks This is a convenient way to rearrange Combinations in the order in which you will use them during a live performance amp Be aware that if you change the order of Programs the sounds played by Combinations may also be affected As an example here we will explain how a combination saved in bank A can be loaded into DOOO
257. play programs see page 21 Oscillator and Drum track level settings see page 27 Simple drum track editing see page 98 Simple arpeggiator editing see page 86 Tone Adjust settings see page 29 Basic program settings such as Oscillator mode see page 32 SW1 2 and knob settings see page 41 P2 OSC Pitch Oscillator selection and pitch settings see page 33 P3 Filter Filter 1 2 tone settings see page 38 Amp 1 2 volume settings see page 40 Amp 1 2 driver and pan settings 3 band parametric EQ settings P5 LFO LFO settings see page 35 P6 AMS Common AMS Mixer settings see page 36 KeyTrack Common keyboard tracking settings P7 Arpeggiator Drum Track P1 Basic Controllers P4 Amp EQ Arpeggiator settings see page 88 Drum track settings see page 100 Oscillator output bus and master effect send level settings see page 79 Insert effect routing selection and settings see page 79 P8 Routing IFX Master effect routing selection and settings see page 80 Total effect selection and settings see page 80 P9 MFX TFX LFO For details on how to access each mode and page please see Basic operations on page 9 Basic oscillator settings Here you can specify the type of program select the basic waveform multisample or drum kit and specify whether it will play polyphonically or monophonically poly mono Program type setting single
258. pressing the COMPARE button i e the settings that are written into memory the LED will go dark and it will not be possible to return to the previous edits by pressing the COMPARE button again Sequencer mode In Sequencer mode you can use the COMPARE button to make before and after comparisons immediately after using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing an edit on a track For example this can be used effectively when realtime recording a MIDI track for a song 1 Realtime record a MIDI track Take 1 2 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 3 Press the COMPARE button The LED will light up and take 1 will be recalled 4 Press the COMPARE button once again The LED will go dark and take 2 will be recalled 5 If at step 3 you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the Compare function will now be referencing take 1 6 If at step 4 you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the Compare function will be referencing take 2 In this way the Compare function lets you recall the previous recording or the previous state of event editing Note If you continue editing when the COMPARE button is lit the button will go dark This now becomes the musical data that will be selected when the COMPARE button is dark Global mode The Compare function that brings back the settings prior to editing is not available in Global
259. r mi F0O1 2 LFO1 Intensity to A 00 JS Y Intensity to A 00 AMS Off LFO2 Intensity to A 00 JS Y Intensity to A 00 AMS Off Common LFO Intensity to A 00 JS Y Intensity to A 00 AMS Off f A _ Intensity to B 00 JS Y Intensity to B 00 Int to A 00 Int to B 00 Intensity to A and Intensity to B specify how much the LFO changes the tone JS Y Intensity to A and JS Y Intensity to B specify the depth of the wah effect produced by the LFO when the joystick is moved toward yourself or when CC 2 is received The AMS setting selects an AMS modulation source to scale the amount of the LFO applied to Filters A and B The two filters share a single AMS source with separate intensity settings For example if AMS is set to SW1 CC 80 turning SW1 on will apply an auto wah effect see page 37 Keyboard Track Most acoustic instruments get brighter as you play higher pitches At its most basic application keyboard tracking re creates this effect by increasing the cutoff frequency of a lowpass filter as you play higher on the keyboard Usually some amount of key tracking is necessary in order to make the timbre consistent across the entire range The KROME keyboard tracking can also be much more complex since it allows you to create different rates of change over up to four different parts of the keyboard For instance you can e Make the filter cutoff frequency increase very quickly o
260. r A is assigned to timbres 1 5 and arpeggiator B is assigned to timbres 6 and 7 When you press any note of the entire keyboard the drum programs of timbres 1 4 will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A When you play the B3 or a lower note on the keyboard the synth programs of timbres 6 and 7 will be sounded by the backing arpeggio pattern e The arpeggiator A parameters Bottom Key and Top Key Combi P7 ARP DT ARP Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiator A will run for the entire keyboard e The B Bottom Key and Top Key Combi P7 ARP DT ARP Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiators B will function only for the note B3 and below e Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 5 as well but this setting is so that the timbre 1 to 4 program will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Refer to the preceding section Combination Bossa Rose SW1 2 Linking the arpeggjiator to programs or combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings written to a program or combination will be recalled when you switch programs or combinations or whether the current arpeggiator settings will be maintained With the factory settings the former is selected Use the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running and change only the program sound This setting is made in Load ARP when changing Global PO Basic Setup Basic page See page 110 Creating a user arpegg
261. r the key is released If it is checked the key will not be held If you turn off Hold in the Program no keys will be held regardless of their Enable Note Off Receive setting Controlling effects for each key Drum Kits have their own built in mixers For each key you can control the Insert Effects bussing Master Effects sends and pan To use separate bus settings for each key 1 Access the Prog P8 Routing IFX Routing page 2 Make sure that the Use DKit Setting check box is checked When Use DKit Setting is on the Program will use the Bus Select and Effects Send settings for each key of the Drum Kit When Use DKit Setting is off the Program will ignore the Drum Kit s Bus Select and Effects Send settings 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 4 Use the Bus IFX Output Select parameter to send drum sounds through their own Insert effects or to the L R outputs If you like you can send each note to its own Insert effect or to the individual audio outputs in addition to the L R outputs For example you might send all snare sounds to IFX1 all kick sounds to IFX2 and the remaining sounds to L R Tip In most preloaded drum kits the drum instruments have the same Bus IFX Output Select settings according to their type as follows Snares IFX1 Kicks IFX2 Other gt IFX3 5 Use Send1 to MFX1 and Send2 to MFX2 to set the send levels to the master effects Cont
262. r the procedure please see Loading the preloaded data on page 125 e Preload data Programs Combinations Drum Kits Global settings User Arpeggio Patterns e Demo song data Loading data from SD card Media Load Loading all Programs Combinations Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns Here we ll explain how to load all data from a PCG file containing Programs Combinations Drum kits Global settings User Arpeggio patterns and Drum Track patterns in a single operation amp When loading Programs Combinations Songs or Drum Kits you must make sure that the Global mode memory protect setting is unchecked For details please see Memory protect on page 117 Note Please see page 117 for details on the SD card from which you can load data 1 Make sure that the media is ready for you to load data For details please see Inserting removing a card in the SD card slot on page 118 2 Access the Media Load page Press the Load tab 3 Press the PCG file containing the program and combination data you want to load so that the file is highlighted e If there are directories press the Open button to move to a lower level or press the Up button to move back to the higher level Ex NEWFILE PCG 81 02 2012 20 00 00 NEWFILE SNG 14K 01 02 2012 00 00 00 SD Card NEW VOLUME e Loan 4 Press the Load button Alternatively choose the menu command Load Selected A dialog box will ap
263. rams Making controller assignments Amp EG The Amp EG lets you control how the volume changes over the course of a note PROG wuts SEG Reset i AMS Off ea v G Threshold 00 ENVELOPE S Level Start K Attack 99 Break 99 Sustain 99 Time Attack Decay 4 Slope 4 Release 17 Curve Attack L Decay 6 WEG Level Time Modulation Level AMS Velocity Time AMS1 Off AMS2 Velocity Slope 6 Release 6 St 00 At 00 Br 00 At 08 Dc 00 SI 0 RI 800 At 80 Dc 00 SI 00 RI 00 AMS3 Off At 80 Dc 00 SI 80 RI 00 Ampt Amp1 Amp2 Amp2 Driver Mod JN E Driver2 J Mod ye Every instrument has its own characteristic volume envelope This is part of what gives each instrument its identifiable character Conversely by changing the volume contour for instance applying a string like Amp EG curve to an organ multisample you can produce interesting and unusual sounds Piano Drive The Drive circuit adds saturation and overdrive to the sound for everything from subtle fattening to drastic distortion Unlike an overdrive effect Drive processes each voice individually so the timbre stays the same regardless of how many voices are being played The two main parameters Drive and Low Boost work together to create the overall effect Drive controls the amount of edge and bite in the timbre Low settings will produce mild saturat
264. reject Programs Per voice nonlinear driver and low boost Three bands with sweepable mid For each voice two envelope generators Filter amp Amp two LFOs two key tracking Modulation generators Filter amp Amp and two AMS mixers In addition pitch EG common LFO and two common key tracking generators Up to sixteen timbres keyboard and velocity split layer crossfade and modifications 16 Timbres i l or to the program setting via the Tone Adjust function Combinations Maximum Polyphony Sound Engine Master Keyboard f These allow you to control external MIDI devices functionality Drum Kits Stereo and mono drumsamples 8 way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes Linear Power Layer The number of 512 Combinations 384 Preload iat 768 Programs 640 Preload Combinations pa 48 Drum Kits 32 Preload Drum Kits 256 GM2 Programs 9 GM2 Drum Programs 5 Insert Effects In line processing stereo in stereo out 2 Master Effects Two effects sends stereo in stereo out For overall processing on the main outputs such as compression limiting and EQ 1 Total Effect stereo in stereo out High low and sweepable mid band Per Program in Program Mode per Timbre in 3 band Track EQ Combination mode 16 total and per Track in Sequencer mode 16 total Effects 193 types Usable for insert master or total effects However double size effects Effec
265. rength and larger values will produce a louder volume Set this to Key If you select Key for this parameter the velocity of how you actually play the keyboard will be input 6 On the keyboard press and then release the first C3 note that you want to input The data you input will appear in the display as numerical values On the upper right side Measure 001 Beat Tick 01 000 will change to Measure 001 Beat Tick 01 360 The next note you input will be placed at this location 7 As described in steps 5 and 6 input the notes and rests that follow the first C3 note In addition to the methods described in steps 5 and 6 you can also use the following input methods e To input a rest press the Rest button This will input a rest of the selected Step Time value e To enter a tie so that two or more notes of the same pitch will be played as a single unbroken note press the Tie button When you press the Tie button the previously input note will be extended by the Step Time length e To delete a note or rest that you input press the Step Back button The previously input note will be deleted e To input a chord simultaneously press the notes of the desired chord Even if you do not press them simultaneously notes that are pressed before you fully remove your hand from all keys on the keyboard will be input at the same location e To audition a note without actually inputting it press the PAUSE I button Now when yo
266. rf ort off 5 off 7 off A off feturntoos0 l Ere 2 In the same way make sure that Drumsamples 3 8 are Off When they are turned off most of their parameters will be grayed out 3 Select Stereo as the Bank for Drumsample1 and Drumsample2 Drumsamples come in several types Mono Stereo VM M or VM S Mono are mono drumsamples and Stereo are stereo drumsamples Stereo drumsamples use twice as many voices as mono drumsamples VM M and VMS are respectively mono and stereo versions of large capacity drumsamples Drumsamples are organized into categories such as bass drum or snare 4 Press the Drumsample popup for Drumsamplel1 This brings up a list of Drumsamples organized by category Use the tabs at the left of the display to browse through the different categories For a list of the Drumsample names please see the Voice Name List Editing a Drum Kit ROM Drumsample SD Normal Normal 0184 SD Amb Piccolo 2 8192 SD Big Rock eine Pace 0185 SD Paper 0193 SD Yowie china Perc 0194 SD Processed 1 SD mal 0186 SD Classic Room SD ce 0187 SD Brush Hit Perc 0195 SD Processed 2 Nav nal 0188 SD Brush Tap 1 196 SD Cracker Room miey Industry i Wm e 0189 SD Brush Tap 2 0197 SD Sidestick mf L HH mal 0190 SD Brush Swirl 0198 SD Sidestick mf R HH ce 0191 SD Atomic SE oe 0199 SD Sidestick Dry Find 5 Select a Drumsample by touching
267. right side of the menu see page 4 The page select menu will appear The page where you were immediately before pressing the PAGE button is shown in a darker color for your reference Basic Information Basic operations PS MIDI Filter ARP amp DRUMTRACK Re Arpeggiator Drum Track EFFECT P8 P9 Routing IFX MFX TFX LFO 2 Press the button for the page that you want to view PO Play is the page you ll normally use when performing on the KROME The same is true in Program mode Editing is done in other pages As an example here try selecting P4 Zone Delay The P4 Zone Delay Key Z T01 08 page will appear Key Zone 101 68 v O ABOA Piano amp Strings T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Top Key C A 3 B4 G9 COMBI WE ATDA ET G9 G9 C3 Top Slope 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Bottom Slope 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Bottom Key C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 C 3 D3 C4 C5 Key Zone Key Zone Yel Zone Vel Zone Delay Delay 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 Note The page that appears will be showing the tab that you most recently selected Using the PAGE button plus the numeric keys 0 9 to access different pages e Hold down the PAGE button and use the numeric keys 0 9 to specify the page number that you want to view The specified page number will appear The page that appears will be showing the tab that you most recently selec
268. rings Category MAGTE Sub Category A Piano To Combination gt ABOO Piano amp Strings _ Cancel o oK Cancel button OK button Text edit button When you press this button the text edit dialog box appears for changing the names of Programs Combinations Songs etc For details please see Editing names on page 117 Character Set Selects Text Cursor the type of character KROME Grand Piano C Symbol Character buttons 1 je 3 4 S 6 B JS O q Ww e r t u i e P a is jd f jg jh ji k 1 Shift button Switches between uppercase and lowercase characters Delete Cancel Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Cursor buttons Move the cursor to left or right Cancel button OK button If you are satisfied with the text that you input press the OK button If you wish to discard your input and exit the text edit box press the Cancel button Clear button Delete all characters of the text Space button Insert a Space at the cursor location OK and Cancel buttons After performing other operations in the dialog box you can execute the command by pressing the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button The operation will occur when you press and release the button The dialog box will close The EXIT button corresponds to the Cance
269. rm the same operations using the on screen transport buttons The song you selected in step 2 will begin playing Note The song will begin playing if you press the START STOP gt Hf button in a page other than P10 Pattern RPPR If you press this button while you re in P10 Pattern RPPR the currently selected pattern will begin playing In P11 Cue List the songs of the cue list will be played 4 During playback you can press the START STOP gt E button to stop playback If you press the START STOP gt W button once again playback will resume from where you stopped For details on the functions of the LOCATE fk PAUSE ID REW 44 and FF gt gt buttons please see page 54 You can use the FF REW Speed menu command to specify the fast forward and rewind speed Playing Songs Playback Changing the volume mute and solo settings of each track In the SEQ P0 Play REC Prog T01 08 T09 16 Mixer T01 08 and T09 16 pages you can change the volume mute and solo settings of each track Muting a specific track Monitoring a specific track Mute Solo functions The KROME provides a Mute function that lets you silence specified tracks 1 16 and a Solo function that lets you hear the specified track or channel by itself These functions can be used in various ways For example you can intentionally mute or solo specific tracks or listen only to the rhythm section of the previously recorded trac
270. rogram s oscillator is set to Double Drums this page will show only the single drum kit that is selected by Drum Kit Select Matching the key of the keyboard with the drum kit In order for the note mappings to match the keyboard the Oscillator s Octave setting needs to be 0 8 All Drum Kit Programs should have this setting already If you re unsure you can check this yourself 1 Go to the OSC1 Setup tab of the OSC Pitch page With a setting other than 0 8 the relationship between the keys and the Drum Kit sound map will be incorrect 2 Set the Global P0 Basic Setup Basic parameter Key Iranspose to 00 Make sure that Memory Protect is disabled Before you start editing go to the Global PO Basic Setup System Preferences page and look in the Memory Protect section Make sure that Drum Kit is not checked if so you won t be able to make any edits Drum Kits may be used by more than one Program When you edit a Drum Kit all Programs that use that Drum Kit will be affected To avoid changing the factory voicing you may wish to copy Drum Kits to empty locations in the USER banks before editing 105 106 Using Drum Kits Editing a Drum Kit Basic Editing pd Select the Program that you wish to use while editing the Drum Kit Access the P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Setup page or the OSC2 Setup page Double Drums only and press the Jump to Drum Kit Edit button If you want to edit th
271. rogram Select Keyboard j Keyboard j Keyboard Keyboard I Bank Timbre Bank Pre Program Select gt AGGG gt ABBG gt ABBB gt ABOO Program Select xpo E Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Grani K Play Mute F F 7 z i Solo On Off M a Ee 2 Use any of the following methods to select a Program for each timbre e Choose Program Select use numeric keys 0 9 to input the program number and press the ENTER button e Choose Program Select and turn the VALUE dial or use the INC DEC buttons e Ifthe Program Select parameter is selected the PROG BANK A F buttons will switch program banks If Timbre Program Select is selected the BANK button LED of the program bank selected for that timbre will light up e From the Bank Program Select menu you can view and select programs by bank e From the Category Program Select menu you can view and select programs by category e You can transmit MIDI program changes from a connected external MIDI device See page 359 of the Parameter Guide Note To select the timbre program via MIDI program change the timbre s status must be set to INT Adjusting the mix Adjusting the volume of each timbre 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Mixer T01 08 page This page shows the volume pan and Program assignments for all 8 Timbres Mixer T01 08 Ly JO Bank A 60 Keuhoar k 91000 Piano amp Strings o Grand Piano
272. rolling pan for each key To use separate pan settings for each key 1 Access the Prog P4 Amp EQ Amp1 Driver1 or Amp2 Drive2 page 2 Under Pan make sure that the Use DKit Setting check box is checked When Use DKit Setting is on the Program will use the pan settings for each key of the Drum Kit 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 4 Use Pan to specify the panning for each key Saving Drum Kits Once you ve spent some time editing you ll want to save your work amp The contents of your editing in Global mode are preserved as long as the power is on but will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep your edits you must execute the Write Drum Kits function This will save all drum kits Adjusting Global KROME setings How Global mode is structured In Global mode you can adjust overall settings for the entire KROME These consist mainly of the following settings e Master tune e Key transpose e Effect global button e Global MIDI channel e Creating scales e Damper pedal assignable foot switch pedal e Category names for programs and combinations e Creating user drum kits e Creating user arpeggio patterns For details on how to access each page please see Basic operations on page 9 Global settings Basic setup GLOBAL AM RETEA ALAT o Tuning and Basic transpose ____ Master Tune settings 440 00Hz Key Transpose 00 Velo
273. rting removing a card in the SD card slot on page 118 2 Access the Media Utility page Press the Utility tab 3 Press the menu button to access the menu and press Format to open the dialog box Volume Label T NEW VOLUME Quick Format Cancel OK Cancel O Full Format 4 In Volume Label use the text edit button to access the text edit dialog box and specify the volume label The previously specified volume label will be displayed If no volume label had been specified for the media or if anon DOS media was inserted this will indicate NEW VOLUME 5 Specify the initialization format Quick Format This erases the file information on the SD card allowing the card to be formatted quickly Normally you ll use this method of formatting Full Format All blocks on the media will be erased Normally there is no need to apply a Full Format you should simply execute Quick Format 6 Press the OK button to format or press the Cancel button if you decide to cancel When you press the OK button a message will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button once again to execute the Format operation amp You must use the KROME to format the media The KROME will not correctly recognize media that has been formatted by another device Setting the current time Specify the date and time this is used to record the correct date and time when you save data You can set
274. s please see Writing a Program or Combination on page 115 You can also save programs on an SD card as PCG files For details please see Saving to SD card Media Save on page 118 Detailed Editing with Programs Before you start editing Detailed Editing with Programs You can create original sounds by editing a preloaded program or by editing an initialized program The programs you create can be saved in banks A F For details please see Saving your edits on page 30 Before you start editing The three elements of sound pitch tone and volume Sound is made up of three basic elements pitch tone and volume The KROME provides pitch filter and amp amplifier sections that allow you to control these elements The pitch section modifies the pitch the filter section modifies the tone and the amp section modifies the volume You ll edit pitch settings in P2 OSC Pitch P2 3 and OSC2 Pitch filter settings in P3 Filter P3 1 3 and amp settings in P4 Amp EQ P4 1 2 EG LFO AMS and controllers In addition to the three elements listed above a sound can vary according to the passage of time the pitch range in which it s played or by performance expressions Such aspects can be controlled by modulators and controllers such as the EG envelope generator LFO low frequency oscillator and joystick These modulators and c
275. s A016 Piano Session SW2 AQ24 SG 1D Piano Ana Strings ant Brass Re AQ17 Piano Trio AQ25 Runnin Wild SW1 R a A018 Comp Piano Rock A 26 HonkyTonk Session SW2 pd A019 The First Time AQ27 Western Bar Knob 1 pode af tarzpi A 2Q JazzyHop Piano SW1 68 Pads Voc lt 4 Jump to Sub A028 Piano Pad Find Cancel OK Find You can search for a combination by a portion of its name The procedure is the same as explained in Find on page 23 Please see that explanation for details Using controllers to modify the sound The KROME provides a variety of controllers that you can use to vary the sound such as the joystick the SW1 SW2 buttons and the control surface knobs It also provides chord trigger buttons For details please see the corresponding explanation for Programs Using Controllers on page 24 Performing with the arpeggjiator or drum track Based on note data it receives from the keyboard or from the MIDI IN connector the arpeggiator can generate a wide range of phrases and patterns including arpeggios guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns When the realtime controls ARP is selected you can use the knobs to vary the duration and dynamics of the arpeggiated notes For more about the arpeggiator please see page 85 The Drum Track function uses a rich variety of drum patterns to play the KROME s high qu
276. s the START STOP gt W button When you ve finished listening press the START STOP gt W button once again to stop playback 9 If you re not satisfied with the result press the COMPARE button to return to the state prior to recording and then re record from step 4 Note When you re finished recording change the Recording Setup back to the normally used Overwrite PO Play REC Preferences page In addition access the P0 Play REC Play Loop T01 08 page check Track Play Loop for track 01 and set the Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to 001 When you play back track 01 will repeatedly play the first measure Recording Step recording Step recording Step recording is the recording method where you specify the duration and strength of each note and use the keyboard to specify the pitch of each MIDI note You can use the Rest button and Tie button of the dialog box to input rests and ties Step recording is useful when you want to create mechanically precise beats or when you need to record a phrase that would be difficult to play by hand in real time or when you find it difficult to play extremely complicated or rapid passages An example of step recording In this example we ll assign a bass program to track 02 and step record the following two measure bass phrase mer Orgy Naat Ste Ste i p p Measure Time Time Key Button Beat Tick Select 3 ra _ key _oniro1000
277. s to fit within a Combination 51 Arpeggiator SettingS cece eee e cee neces 52 Drum Track S ttingS ccc ccc cee eee eens 52 ENOS eea tp Bia tah ho EE EE 52 Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer MOdE ccc eee eee ees 52 Creating songs Sequencer mode 53 OVGIVIEW sic cetiec dene eh swans scekeceianeses 53 About the KROME s Sequencer 00e 53 Sequencer mode StructUre cece eee ee eee 53 Transpor CONUOl ack fe a aide N EEA 54 Playing SONGS 6 60 6 55 65 626 Seca ss sis 4 sala See s 55 PIAVOACK jst ac 644 Rane aoa ee eter Pave Bae ele wand 55 RECO GING baiasesses ri Eser Naren EEES 57 Preparations for recording ec cece e eee 57 Recording MIDI in real time 005 60 Step recording esrara n E E AERA 61 Recording multiple tracks from an external SEGUEN CEF zesh ana eE EEE A 63 Recording System Exclusive events 64 Recording patterns ccc ccc cee dertte 65 Other way to record cc cece ccc cece eeeees 66 SONG CITING ig 6035 Stasi ei eeaswcenecedeaeiws 67 SOI DPLI E eu ne amare mee ero oe eee to ate ee 67 MIDIMGACKS c2nesiadiicte aah tecaoeesatuastanaes 67 Track view edit csiccunareoosipaaienesteeassmaste 68 Piano Roll EdiItING rosei arnam ET ea EI 70 Table of Contents Creating an RPPR pattern cccesecees 71 Creating RPPR data cc cece cece ee eens 71 RPPR Olaya CK o siv cheugnad aie wa
278. s transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will trigger any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel amp On some preloaded Combinations Timbres used by the arpeggiator may have their MIDI Channels set to something other than Gch These will be timbres that play only when the arpeggiator is on which is a very useful technique for creating Apreggiator based Combinations For details please see Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes on page 89 In particular note the relationships between arpeggiator A B assignments and MIDI Channel MIDI filter settings For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmitted and received The checked items will be transmitted and received The MIDI filters don t turn the functions themselves on or off Instead the filter just controls whether or not that MIDI message will be transmitted and received PS MIDI Filter lt 1 gt 701 08 v O J 078 00 AOOO Piano amp Strings T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch Keyboard Organ Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Drums Strings Enable Program Change m m m Enable After Touch m Enable Damp g Enable Portamen m MIDI lt 1 gt MIDI lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 3 g
279. s will not produce any change These adjustments are available only if a user arpeggio pattern U0000 INT U1027 USER is selected Note The state of the knobs is saved when you write the program Note Depending on the program that s selected using knob 4 may not produce any effect Selecting an arpeggio pattern and specifying its function In the Prog P0 Play Arpeggiator page you can select an arpeggio pattern and specify how the arpeggiator will function e In Prog PO Play press the ARP tab to access the Prog PO Play Arpeggiator page Murcia VY G Category gt 00 Keyboard GATE 00 Arpeggiator Pattern U as7 INT Key Piano Wide Arpeggio 3 a Resolution 3 VELOCITY 00 SWING 00 STEP 00 Octave 1 O 2 C Sort m Key Sync O3 O4 C Latch Keyboard Mixer Tone in ARP aust Selecting an arpeggio pattern An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset arpeggio patterns P0 P4 and user arpeggio patterns UOO000 INT U1027 USER The factory settings UO000 INT U0899 INT U0900 USER U1027 USER contain a wide variety of preloaded user arpeggio patterns e Choose Pattern and use the VALUE dial INC DEC buttons and popup menu to select an arpeggio pattern User arpeggio patterns can also be selected by using the numeric keys 0 9 to input the pattern number and then pressing the ENTER button PO UP tS Using the arpeg
280. setting for D2 Now press the notes consecutively Notice that the patterns function in a different way With the Measure setting patterns will be handled in one measure units The second and subsequent patterns will start in sync with the end of pattern that was previously played If you change the Mode setting to Once the entire pattern will playback to the end even if you release your finger from the keyboard immediately e To stop playback either press the same key once again or press the C2 or lower key For details on Sync Mode and Shift please see page 158 of the Parameter Guide e The assigned keys are also shown in the keyboard eraphic in the display e Keys where no patterns are assigned can be played normally Use Track Select to select the track you want to play For example you could assign backing patterns for drums or bass to keys C 2 B2 and use these keys to control the pattern playback while using the keys C3 and above to play a solo performance in realtime It s a good idea to keep your RPPR assignments within a specific range of keys 71 72 Creating songs Sequencer mode RPPR playback Let s use the RPPR pattern that you created to perform in the PO Play REC Program T01 08 page 1 Access the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page RPPR On SEQ iCaeEl ae Program 101 08 ik iG Dro gop Meter 4 4 J 120 00 l Manual S000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 Resolut
281. sounds or global settings see page 12 amp If the KROME s auto power off function is enabled its power will automatically turn off if there has been no user input for a certain length of time Unsaved data will be lost even if the power is turned off by the auto power off function Turn the KROME s VOLUME knob all the way to the left so that the volume is lowered If external equipment such as powered monitor speakers are connected lower their volume and then turn off their power 15 16 Setup 3 Press the power switch on the KROME s rear panel to turn the power off amp The KROME internal data may be damaged if the power is turned off while data is being written into internal memory such as during a Save operation Never turn off the power while processing is being performed The following message is displayed while data is being written into internal memory Now writing into internal memory If writing to internal memory could not be completed successfully the KROME will automatically repair the internal memory by initializing it the next time you turn on the power This is not a malfunction If this occurs the following message will appear in the display press the OK button The internal memory has been corrupted likely due to an interruption of power while the system was writing saving data This has been repaired and the affected Bank has been initialized amp A small amount
282. splay 2 PROG PO Play 1 Mode name button f S U SS Vv 3 Program Select Bank A J000 KROME Grand Piano USER CONTROLS IFX1 St Graphic 7EQ 1 F A Attack 2 St Exciter Enhner DEC Da 2 Knob Mod 2 4 3 No Effect I 3 Knob Mod 3 4 No Effect 6A 4 Knob Mod 4 5 No Effect E3 0 ey x i A 4 INC DEC buttons 4 5 6 A D E F C EJ PROG EA 0 ENTER n m a ae E3 G E3 C GJ 1 ROG buttons 5 BANK A F buttons 4 Numeric keypads ENTER button Velocity meter EXIT PAGE 4 VALUE dial 21 22 Playing and editing Programs For example to select bank B press the PROG BANK B button The B button will light up and the name Bank B will appear on the left side of the display e To select a GM bank you ll use the numeric keys GM Hold down 0 and press g 1 g 9 Hold down 0 and press the desired num ber 1 9 For banks that do not have variation sounds the basic GM sounds will be recalled An will be appended to the beginning of the pro gram name g d Hold down 0 and press Auditioning the sound Play the keyboard to audition the program you ve selected The velocity meter shows the note on velocity e This shows the velocity value of note on events for the global MIDI c
283. ssible that a DC component will be output at the maximum level producing silence e When using the 003 Stereo Limiter or 006 Stereo Gate and the Envelope Source of these effects is set as either FX Control 1 or FX Control 2 and Trigger Monitor is On e When using 174 Vocoder with the Modulator Source set to FX Control 1 or FX Control 2 and the Modulator High Mix set to other than 0 Can t play chords Could the program s Voice Assign Mode be set to Mono gt p 33 Troubleshooting Programs and Combinations Pitch is incorrect e In the Global PO Basic Setup page are the Master Tune and Transpose settings correct gt p 109 e Inthe Prog P2 OSC Pitch page is the Pitch Slope set to 1 0 gt PG p 20 e In the combination or song are the Transpose and Detune settings of each timbre track set appropriately gt PG p 82 p 127 e Inthe timbre track settings of each program combination or song could you have selected a non standard scale type other than Equal Temperament gt PG p 15 p 83 p 128 Programs and Combinations Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed Make sure that the Oscillator Mode Prog P1 Basic Controllers parameter is set to Double or Double Drums gt p 32 Program does not sound Could the oscillator or amp level be lowered gt PG p 5 p 6 p 35 Could the program be muted e Use the Play Mute button in the Prog PO Play Mixer amp Drum Track page to mute unmute a pr
284. st function lets you edit the parameters of the program The program parameters that are most effective for editing will be assigned to the controllers in the display 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Tone Adjust page This page shows and reflects data generated by the tone adjust function letting you view the parameter assignments and their precise values 2 To edit the sound select a slider 1 8 or button 1 8 in the display and use the VALUE dial etc to use it You can edit the value of a slider by dragging it in the display Note You can assign the principal program parameters to the various controllers in the display For details please see page 7 of the Parameter Guide For example 1 Select Program A069 Deluxe E Piano 2 Access the P0 Play Tone Adjust page 3 Look at the assignments for sliders 5 6 and 8 in the display Slider 5 is assigned to F A EG Attack Time slider 6 is assigned to F A EG Decay Time and slider 8 is assigned to F A EG Release Time 4 Raise each of the three sliders so that they are about 4 5 of the way to the top The display should show their values as between 60 and 70 This means that you have edited the filter EG and amp EG attack delay and release to longer values 5 Play a few notes Notice that the sound has changed from an electric piano into a soft pad Next let s add just a bit of filter modulation to make the sound more rich 6 Notice the assignm
285. sures e Delete unnecessary measures Measure size over limit Meaning When loading a Standard MIDI File the number of events in a measure exceeded the maximum approximately 65 535 events Meaning The attempted edit procedure would cause the maximum number of events in a measure approximately 65 535 to be exceeded To solve either of these problems e Use event editing etc to delete unwanted data Media changed Meaning When executing the Copy command in the Media mode Utility page the media was exchanged or ejected and it was not possible to copy between separate media on the same drive Media unavailable Meaning You selected a media source that does not allow writing Media write protected Meaning The other writing destination media is write protected e Turn off write protect on the other media and execute the command once again Memory full Meaning When editing a song track or pattern in Sequencer mode the total data of all songs has used up all of the sequence data memory and further editing is not possible To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to regain free memory Meaning While realtime recording in Sequencer mode there is no more free memory to accommodate the recorded data so recording has been forcibly halted To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to regain the amount of free memory Memory overflow Meaning While receiving exclusive data in Medi
286. t lt 4 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 6 gt 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 Aa _ 7 7 o gt os For example if portamento is on portamento will be applied to the internal KROME sound even if Enable Portamento SW is unchecked As another example let s say that you ve selected a bass Program for Timbre 1 and a piano Program for Timbre 2 with the goal of creating a bass piano split You could choose the following settings so that pressing the damper pedal affects only Timbre 2 s piano sound 1 Access the P5 1 MIDI Filter lt 1 gt T01 08 page 2 Un check the Enable Damper box for Timbre 1 3 Check the Enable Damper box for Timbre 2 Detailed Editing with Combinations Altering Programs to fit within a Combination Altering Programs to fit within a Combination You can make various changes to Programs within the context of a particular Combination to make them fit better with other Programs or to create particular sonic effects These changes do not affect the original Programs or how those Programs sound in other Combinations see page 81 of the Parameter Guide Timbre Parameters OSC COMBI Reed t E OSC T01 08 V IO AOOO Piano amp Strings J 120 00 T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch 1 E 4 5 rd z Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Force OSC Mode oR Orra Orre OPrRG OPRG OPRG OPRG OPRG OSC Select
287. t your edited data to be preserved after the power is turned off you must perform a Write operation There are two ways to write a Program or Combination e Use the WRITE button e Use the Write Program or Write Combination menu commands in the upper right of the display amp Before you can write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode For details please see Memory protect on page 117 Saving data Writing to internal memory amp A combination does not contain the actual program data for each timbre but simply references the number of the program used by each timbre If you edit a program that is used by a combination or exchange it with a different program number the sound of the combination will also change reflecting the altered program 1 Verify that the program or combination you want to save is selected 2 Press the WRITE button Alternatively press the page menu button in the upper right of the display and select the menu command Write Program or Write Combination The Write Program or Write Combination dialog box will appear Write Program ABOO T KROME Grand Piano Category 00 Keyboard Sub Category 8 A Piano To Program PUA MAE OK Cancel This screenshot is for Program mode 3 Check the program combination name displayed in the upper line the writing source 4 If you wish to change the name of the progr
288. t Switch Controller C 91 95 Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFXs MFXs TFX C 14 22 25 Arpeggiator Controllers 6 38 Data Entry MSB LSB 96 97 Data Increment Decrement 100 101 RPN LSB MSB 0 119 Realtime Control USER 1 4 Seq Data C Seq when received 120 121 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers C Program O 0 127 Change Variable Range FOI IIIA System Exclusive Song Position When cue list is selected corresponds to cue list 1 Common oo Select When cue list is selected corresponds to cue list 0 19 1 une System System Clock Real Time Command Local On Off Aux All Notes Off O 123 127 Messages Active Sense Reset x Notes P A C E Transmitted received when Global P1 MIDI Filter Program Change Aftertouch Control Change Exclusive is Enable respectively 1 When Global P1 MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for External MIDI 2 Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2 Controllers The number shown here is the CC default assignment 3 RPN LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION IMPORTANT
289. t the locate point during playback by holding down the ENTER button and pressing the LOCATE fk button START STOP gt W button This starts or stops recording and playback in Sequencer mode REC button Pressing this button will enter record ready mode Once you re in record ready mode shown by the button s lit LED you can begin recording by pressing the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button For details please see Recording MIDI in real time on page 60 Buttons in the display the transport bar The transport buttons in the bottom line of the display can also be used to control sequencer recording and playback in the same way as the front panel SEQUENCER buttons The transport buttons will appear when you press the lt button on the lower right side of the display and drag it toward the left To close them press the gt button and drag it toward the right E E e rm S E gt E A fo ff lt gt SET LOCATE REC START PAUSE REW FF popup LOCATE STOP Playing Songs Playback In order to play back song data in the sequencer you must first record load or dump song data into the KROME Let s start by loading and playing the demo song data For details please see Listening to the demo songs on page 21 of the Quick Start Guide 1 Press the SEO button or MODE button to enter Sequencer mode The PO Play REC Program T01 08 or T09 16 page will appear If
290. t womnasneaneneaa ts 72 Realtime recording an RPPR performance 72 Creating and playing a Cue List 74 Creating a CUC ISt 6 cece eee ee eee ee eees 74 Converting a cue list t0aSONG eee eee eee 75 Saving your SONG sesssssssssosesosossoe 75 Using EffectS sesssessesseose 77 An overview of the KROME s effects 77 ENECO nreiasen tie tice oon EEE BEN 77 Effects ineach MOde cece cee eee eens 78 Routing effect settings cccececcccees 79 Program Effects settingS cece eee ees 79 Using effects in Combinations and Songs 81 Dynamic modulation Common FX LFO 82 Dynamic modulation DMod ee eee 82 COMMON FX LFO airet eri Beet ac Sera nth treet ence tone ners 83 Arpeggiator function 85 Using the arpeggiator while you play 85 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 85 Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode 88 Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes cee cece cece e eee ees 89 Linking the arpeggiator to programs or COMDINALIONS xcscawsaksecesaedcidresieate sees 91 Creating a user arpeggio pattern 91 Regarding arpeggiator synchronization 96 Drum Track function 97 Performing with the Drum Track function 97 Using the Drum Track function in Program MOG cccnutonuaaetat ecu S 97 Using the Drum Track functio
291. ta from an external device that was saved on the KROME This allows the KROME to be used as a data filer e MID file Saves a Sequencer mode song in Standard MIDI File SMF format See the illustration on the following page MIDI data dump The KROME can transmit the following types of data as a MIDI data dump you can save this data on an external data filer or other device e Programs combinations drum kits and global settings e Song and cue list e User drum kit patterns e User arpeggio pattern For details please see Dump on page 218 of the Parameter Guide 113 114 Loading amp saving data Supported file types Pe E All programs 1 program 1 program DOS directory bank A F ions 1 combination 1 combination Undefined DOS file bank A D All drum kits 1 drum kit 1 drum kit User bank INT USER All user 1 user arpeggio patterns arpeggiopattern bank INT USER All drum track 1 drum track patterns pattern Global settings Pe 1 song SO00 127 1 user pattern U00 99 ee mn wee Writing to internal memory Writing a Program or Combination About the Program and Combination edit buffer When you select a program in Prog P0 Play ora combination in Combi P0 Play the program or combination data is called into the KROME s edit buffer When you then use the various Program or Combination pages to edit the parameters y
292. taken your hand off the keyboard You can select whether the arpeggio will continue playing when you take your hand off the keyboard or whether the arpeggio will stop e Press the Latch check box to make this setting Checked The arpeggio will continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard Unchecked The arpeggio will stop playing when you remove your hand from the keyboard Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your keyboard timing You can specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the moment you play the keyboard or whether it will always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock tempo e Press the Key Sync check box to make this setting Checked The arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning when you press a key This setting is suit able when you want the arpeggio to start from the beginning of the measure as you are playing in real time Unchecked The arpeggiator will synchronize to the MIDI clock timing Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the notes you play e Press the Keyboard check box to adjust this setting Checked The notes you play on the keyboard and the notes played by the arpeggiator will both be heard 87 88 Arpeggiator function Unchecked Only the arpeggiated notes will sound PROG LME Arpeggiator Tempo ARP Setup VY IG J 109 00 Arpeggiator Setup ke Pattern MLELA E aA ERa ee P pR Resolution A Octave a 1 Gate Step Velo
293. tch can perform a wide variety of functions such as e An assignable source for modulating sounds and effects e Portamento on off e Program select up or down e Sequencer start stop or punch in out e Tap Tempo Connections Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal e Arpeggiator on off e Switch the Drum Track on off e Use various KROME controls realtime control knobs joystick SW1 SW2 etc This button will always function in the same way regardless of the Program Combination or Song you ve selected You can assign the function in the Global mode Using a foot switch to select Programs You can select programs by using a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack By assigning the appropriate function you can increment or decrement the program number in steps of one This lets you change Programs without using your hands great for quick Program changes in live performance situations There are two ways of doing this by assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down or to Value Inc Dec Each of these is suited to a particular application as described below e Prog Up Down When performing in the normal PO screen e VALUE Inc Dec When performing while a list such as the Category Program Select menu is open Assigning the foot switch to Program Up Down Assigning the foot switch to Program Up or Program Down lets you directly control Program changes from the foot switch For most situations this
294. ted Note In pages consisting of multiple pages such as P5 1 P5 2 P8 1 and P8 2 the first page P5 1 or P8 1 will be selected Using the EXIT button to move between pages If you re in a page other than page 0 e g Prog PO Play of each mode pressing this button will take you to page 0 This button makes it easy to return to the main page of the current mode e Press it once to go to the previously selected tab on the main PO Play page Play REC page in Sequencer mode e Press it again to go to the first tab on the main PO Play page such as the main Program Play page If you had previously selected a parameter on this page that parameter will be selected e Press it a third time to select the main parameter on the PO Play page such as the Program name in Program mode 10 Introduction to the KROME When a dialog box is open this button cancels the settings made in the dialog box and closes the dialog box just like pressing the Cancel button If a popup menu or menu is open pressing EXIT closes the menu Selecting pages e You can access tabbed pages by pressing the tabs shown in the bottom line of the display This example shows the Program T01 08 page through Mixer T01 08 page of Combi PO Play COMBI CHAEL Mba die VY G Bank A y 00 keyboara e 51000 Piano amp Strings T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch Keyboard Strings LeadSynth Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Drums Bass Syntt
295. ter looking at the different waveforms select Triangle 4 Select the Shape parameter and use the VALUE dial to move through its different settings from 99 to 99 Notice how the shape of the waveform becomes more curved and how 99 emphasizes the lower part of the shape and 99 emphasizes the upper part 5 Select the Phase parameter and use the VALUE dial to sweep through its range of values Notice how the waveform shifts from side to side Among other things this lets you offset the LFOs from one another in time which can create interesting organic effects 6 Use the Freq Frequency parameter to set the speed of the LFO 7 Use the Fade and Delay settings to control the way the LFO sounds at the beginning of the note For more information on LFOs please see page 42 of the Parameter Guide All of these parameters control the way that the LFO works In order for the LFO to actually affect the sound you can use the dedicated LFO routings on the Filter Pitch and Amp pages or use the LFOs as AMS sources for a wide variety of parameters Using EGs Envelope Generators An envelope creates a modulation signal by moving from one level to another over a specified time and then moving to another level over another period of time and so on The Program includes three EGs for Pitch Filter and Amp These produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively They can also be used to modulat
296. tereo Multisamples use twice as many voices as Mono Multisamples e If using velocity crossfade switching the multisample will use twice as many voices as usual Oscillator image setting You can specify the program oscillator image that s shown in the PO Play Main page Adjust this setting in Prog P1 Basic Controllers Program Basic Oscillator Mode OSC Picture 1 and 2 1 Press the OSC Picture 1 or 2 popup button gt or the image icon shown at right the dialog box will appear OSC Picture 1 2 To select an image press an image in the list in the lower part of the screen or at the left or right in the upper part 3 Press the OK button to confirm your choice Polyphonic monophonic playing The Voice Assign Mode selects whether the Program will play polyphonically Poly or monophonically Mono When this is set to Poly you can play both chords and melody lines When this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you ll set this to Poly but Mono is useful when playing sounds such as synth basses synth leads and other solo instruments Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen to the results Working with Multisamples What is a multisample A sample is a digital recording of a particular instrument or waveform or other natural or artificially processed sound recorded at a specific pitch A multisample is a col
297. the SELECT button These controls function as follows e You can apply modulation to sounds or edit them e You can control the arpeggiator REALTIME CONTROLS O TONE CUTOFF RESONANCE EG INT RELEASE USER 1 2 3 4 ARP GATE VELOCITY SWING STEP OO 0 O Playing Programs Using Controllers 1 Press the SELECT button to select the realtime control function between TONE USER or ARP TONE USER Use the knobs to modify the sound or effects see page 28 ARP Use the knobs to control the arpeggiator see page 86 You can freely switch between these functions without losing your current edits 2 Use knobs 1 4 to control the selected functions When you turn one of these knobs that knob s function and value will appear in a popup You can prevent this popup from appearing See page 111 amp There will be a slight amount of play when turning the knob near its minimum or maximum positions TEMPO knob and TAP button This adjusts the tempo for the KROME as a whole including e Arpeggiator e Drum Track e Songs in Sequencer mode e Tempo synced LFOs e Tempo synced BPM delay effects TEMPO LED The LED will blink at quarter note intervals of the current tempo TEMPO knob This knob adjusts the tempo It s a convenient way to make continuous adjustments Note If the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to External MIDI External USB or if it is set to Auto and a c
298. the Insert button A song will be added to step 02 Press the popup button and then choose S001 VERSE from the list In the same way select the Step 03 Song and press the Insert button to add a song to Step 03 Set this to S002 CHORUS When you press the Cut button the selected step will be deleted and temporarily saved When you press the Insert button the song that was cut will be insert at the selected step If you press the Copy button the selected step will be copied If you press the Insert button the copied step will be inserted 3 Set the last step to End If you set this to Continue to Step01 the cue list will play back repeatedly 4 In Repeat specify the number of times that the song for that step will be repeated For this example set Step 02 S001 VERSE to 02 5 Specify whether effect settings will also be switched when the song at each step is played back If you want effect settings to change check the Load FX check box For this example check the Load FX check box for Step 01 which loads the effects 6 To play back at the tempo that was specified for each song set Tempo Mode to Auto If this is set to Manu Manual playback will use the tempo specified by J Meter 4 4 C00 NEW CUELIST 00 Track 1 Drums J 59 28 E091 Basic Kit1 STEP 01 03 SONG 001 INTRO Length 008 Step Measure Song Repeat Load FX
299. the date and time by using the Media Utility page s Set Date Time menu command amp The KROME does not contain an internal calendar or clock you must use the Utility menu command Set Date Time to set the date and time before saving the file 1 Press the MEDIA button to enter Media mode 2 Access the Media Utility page Press the Utility tab 3 Open the menu and select the Set Date Time command The following dialog box will appear Year 2012 Month 3 Day 01 Hour 66 Minute BO Second Cancel OK 4 Use the VALUE controllers to set the correct year month day hour minute and second 5 Press the OK button 123 Loading amp saving data 124 Appendices Restoring the factory settings Loading the preloaded data The original preload data is backed up in the KROME so you can restore any or all of the Programs Combinations Drum Kits User Arpeggio Patterns and Global settings to their original factory settings Note The original demo songs can be re loaded at any time For details please see About the data loaded by All Preload PCG and Demo Songs User banks and user patterns into which preload data has not been loaded will remain unchanged If you want to erase user banks or user patterns initialize the KROME and then load the preload data For more details please see Initialization on page 125 amp Never turn off the power while the data is being load
300. the file before you save it For details please see Editing names on page 117 Please note when saving e When using Save All PCG amp SNG and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each timbre or the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits user drum track patterns and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs Time required when saving data e The length of time required will depend on the amount of data being saved Using the KROME as a data filer The KROME can receive MIDI System Exclusive data sent by an external device and save this data to media This is sometimes referred to as the Data Filer function For details please see Save Exclusive on page 232 of the Parameter Guide 119 120 Loading amp saving data Loading data Data that can be loaded Loading from media You can load the following data from media e PCG file Programs Combinations Drum Kits Global settings User Arpeggio Patterns and User Drum Track patterns e SNG file Song and cue list e MID file Standard MIDI file SMF format e EXL file MIDI exclusive data Loading the preloaded data and demo songs to restore the factory settings You can load the factory settings and demo songs back into the KROME s internal memory Fo
301. the meter will respond even if key zone settings or velocity zone settings are such that the note is not sounded Timbres whose Play Mute and Solo settings allows them to play are shown in a dark color and timbres that are muted are shown in a light color T 1 A GG KROME Grand Piano Ch 91G 1 a El 4 Category 7 8 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 gt 00 Keyboard Keyboard j Keyboard j Keyboard Keyboard j Keyboard J Keyboard Keyboard Bank Program gt aooo gt aooo gt ABBA gt ABBQ gt ABO gt ADAB gt ABB gt ADDO KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran KROME Gran ARP ARP Tone 1 A B Adjust f f f gt f D a Velocity meter Overview Combination Banks With the factory settings the KROME contains 384 preloaded combinations that are GM2 compatible In addition to these there are 128 combinations to store sounds that you create or store optional sound libraries Combinations are organized into four banks as shown in the following table Combination bank contents Bank Combi No Explanation 000 127 Factory Combinations Do 000 127 Initialized Combinations Selecting by Bank Combination Select menu You can select Combinations from a list organized by Combination bank e Press the Combination Select popup button to access the menu a
302. this is not displayed press the EXIT button about three times 2 Use Song Select to select the song you want to play back You can press the Song Select popup button and choose from a list If you select an empty list a new song will be created You can also select a song by using the INC DEC button or VALUE dial However if there is no song you can t make a selection using the VALUE controllers Meter Tempo BETE SEQ R an Program T 1 at trip Meter 4 4 090 00 Manual Song Select SS ds Popup ry S000 Missing Person Fo Track12 ANALOG STRINGS Resolution Hi RPPR T12 4A010 Analog Strings Stereo 1 E Location Song Position Bar Ch 12 RPPR NoAssign Track Select 5 E r Category gt 15 gt 15 gt 15 1 oo gt 00 gt 08 gt 15 Category prums Drums Drums Drums Keyboard Keyboard Bass Syn Drums p S Bank Progra m rogram select S e119 E096 E19 Q E093 aoo A073 cass _ E093 amp Popup BD amp SD Cata Power Kit 2 BD amp SD Cata Basic Kit 2 KROME Gra pian Ree m oo Solo N Pre 3 Prog ixer ARP ARP Tone ES 9 16 A B just rences Track 1 E Track 2 3 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button Alternatively pull out the transport bar and press the START STOP gt W button The transport control functionality in the procedure below is described as button operations but you can also perfo
303. ting procedures to a song The available types of editing procedures are listed below Song Load Save Template Song Loads a song template into the song or saves a song as a template see page 58 Copy From Combination Copy From Program Copies the settings of the specified combination program to the settings of the song that s currently selected Copy From Song This command copies all of the setting data and musical data from the specified song to the song that s currently selected Rename song Renames the selected song You can enter up to 24 characters Delete Song This command deletes the currently selected song FF REW Speed This allows you to set the speed at which fast forward or rewind will occur when you press the FF P gt button or REW 44 button GM Initialize This command transmits a GM System On message to the Sequencer mode resetting all MIDI tracks to the GM settings Set Song Length This command changes the length of the specified song When it is executed the length of the master track will change and the number of measures played will change MIDI tracks Tracks Step Recording This allows you to specify the length and velocity of each note numerically and to input MIDI data the pitches from the keyboard You can use the Rest button and Tie button to enter a rest or tie Event Edit Here you can edit individual events of MIDI data Piano Roll Allows you to edit notes
304. tion with the drum track If you want the arpeggiator to synchronize to the drum track pattern that s currently playing uncheck the Key Sync setting In this case the arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat of the drum track pattern that s currently playing If you want the drum track pattern to synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running turn on the Sync setting the Trigger parameter of the Drum Track page of each mode Synchronization between the arpeggiator and sequencer in Sequencer mode If song playback is stopped e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the internal MIDI clock timing e If an RPPR pattern is playing in Sequencer mode the arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat based on that pattern If you want the RPPR pattern playback to synchronize to the arpeggiator that s currently running set Sync to SEQ SEQ P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page Pattern playback will synchronize to the J Tempo timing of the arpeggiator While playing back or recording a song e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat based on the timing of the song Synchronization with Song Start e If the arpeggiator is turned on ARP button is on and is running it will reset to the beginning of its arpeggio pattern when a Song Start is received This is unaffected by the Key Sync setting e In Sequencer mode when Key Sync is unchecked and the ARP button is
305. to the piano roll Displays the values for the control message name indicated Scroll button in the left of the screen Track view area gt Track View Setup Pattern Song editing Track view edit 5 In this example an event exists in the move destination measure so the Drag Move dialog box will appear Overwrite will overwrite the source data over the destination data replacing the destination data with the source data Merge will combine the source and destination data Press the OK button to execute the move If there are no events in the move destination measures this dialog box will not appear the move will occur immediately Track View Drag Move Destination is not empty Choose Overlap Method O Merge Overwrite Cancel OK The destination is overwritten If you choose Overwrite y by the source data T01 E091 Basic Kit1 Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign FROM MEASURE 00S To END f MEASURE 006 1 a 4 5 5 le le lE ME Z Setup _ _ R If you choose Merge The two sets of data are combined T01 E091 Basic Kiti Ch 01 RPIPRWoAssign EROM MEASURE 003 a Te END of HEAA RE 206 N Ci t f a E E 2 Setup Ql Example Moving the data of an entire track 1 Return the location to the beginning 2 Press the tool 3 Press the left side of measure 1 in the track you want to move
306. ton Prog Pla ee op Pla aloo op 1 8 9 16 1 8 9 16 A B Adjust rences 16 Recording Preparations for recording Track settings Since we re going to record a new song in this example we will start by explaining how to assign a program to each track and adjust basic settings such as volume 1 Assign a program to each track Use Program Select to assign a program to each track The method is the same as when assigning a program to a timbre in a combination see page 46 You can copy various settings from Programs or Combinations See pages 166 167 of the Parameter Guide 2 When assigning a program you can use Track Select to choose the track to which you wish to assign a program and audition the sound 3 Set the pan and volume of each track Press the Mixer 1 8 tab or the Mixer 9 16 tab to access the Mixer T01 08 page Mixer T09 16 page SEQ Zeer Meter 4 4 S001 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 T 1 A000 KROME Grand Piano Mixer T01 08 J 120 08 Manual Resolution Hi RPPR Ch 61 RPPR NoAssign Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Pan e Pan sets the pan position of each track and Volume sets the volume level of each track 4 Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel that will be played by each track Press the PAGE button to access SEQ Page Select and press P3 Track Parameters The P3 Track Paramet
307. ts types cannot be used as the total effect Modulation Effects Control Bus Effects Presets Dynamic Modulation two common LFOs Stereo side chaining for limiter gates vocoders etc Up to 32 per Effect Program mode one arpeggiator available Combination and Sequencer modes two arpeggiators available Dual polyphonic arpeggiators 5 preset arpeggio patterns 1028 user arpeggio patterns 900 preload 605 patterns Held in common with sequencer preset patterns 1 000 patterns Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track Preset patterns Drum Track User patterns Trigger Mode Sync Zone settings can be specified user patterns 16 MIDI Tracks amp 1 Master Track 128 Songs Resolution 480 ppq parts per quarter note Tempo 40 00 300 00 bpm 1 100 bpm resolution Up to 210 000 MIDI events Sequencer 16 preset 16 user template songs Cue list function 20 cue lists Songs can be arranged consecutively or repeatedly in up to 99 steps A cue list can be converted back into a song 605 Presets 100 User Patterns per Song PatSmS RERR RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording 1 set per Song Korg KROME format SMF formats 0 and 1 supported Medi Load Save Utility edia Data Filer functionality Save and Load MIDI System Exclusive Data Specifications Operating requirements Joystick SW1 2 REALTIME CONTROLS TONE USER ARP Arpeggio control Displa TouchView graphical user interface 7 i
308. ttern locations available Meaning When converting a song s user pattern to a user drum track pattern you have exceeded the number of user drum track patterns available for use e As necessary execute the Media mode Save PCG command to save your user drum track patterns In Sequencer mode execute the menu command Erase Drum Track Pattern to increase the number of available drum track user patterns Then try the conversion procedure again Not enough Drum Track pattern memory Meaning When converting a song s user pattern to a user drum track pattern there was not enough free memory e As necessary execute the Media mode Save PCG command to save your user drum track patterns In Sequencer mode execute the menu command Erase Drum Track Pattern to erase other user drum track patterns and increase the amount of free memory Then try the conversion procedure again Not enough memory Meaning When starting realtime recording in Sequencer mode the minimum amount of free memory such as memory for the BAR events up to the recording start location could not be allocated To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to regain free memory Not enough memory to load Meaning When you attempted to load a SNG file or a standard MIDI file in Media mode there was insufficient free memory in the sequence memory To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to regain free memory Not enough memory to open p
309. tup KEY DA m Assign Mode Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync Beat Pattern Preset P001 Pop amp Ballad 1 All Revert to last assigned Track Track 1 MIDI TRACK 1 Shift T 1 E 91 Basic Kit1 Ch 01 var e ns 8 Assign patterns to other keys For KEY press the INC button to select D2 9 Press the Revert button The Assign Pattern Bank Pattern Select and Track settings will be given the previously steps 5 7 specified values 10 Choose Pattern Select and press the INC button to select P002 By using Revert in this way you can work efficiently when assigning contiguous or nearby pattern numbers or tracks Creating an RPPR pattern Creating RPPR data P1 Pattern RPPR S000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK 1 ery vV G J 120 00 E091 Basic Kit1 S RPPR Setup KEY D2 m Assign Mode Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync Beat Pattern Preset HALEPA Revert to last assigned Track Track 1 MIDI TRACK 81 Shift 00 T 1 E091 Basic Kit1 Dae ie e As described above assign several other patterns such as P003 and higher 11 Press the C 2 key The assigned pattern will play 12 Take your finger off the C 2 key and press the D2 key The pattern will change and playback will begin At this time the pattern operation will depend on the Sync and Mode setting 13 Set KEY to C 2 and set Sync to Measure Make the same
310. u play a note on the keyboard it will sound but the note will not be actually input In this state playing a key will produce a sound but will not input a note Press the PAUSE I button once again to cancel the record pause state and resume inputting notes 8 When you are finished recording press the Done button Press the SEQUENCER START STOP gt W button to play back Access the P0 Play REC Play Loop T01 08 page check Track Play Loop for track 02 set Loop Start Measure to 001 and Loop End Measure to 002 track 02 will play measures 1 2 repeatedly 9 If you re not satisfied with the result press the COMPARE button to return to the state prior to recording and then re record from step 4 amp When you begin step recording all data in the track that follows the measure where you began recording will be erased You need to be aware of this if you begin step recording from a measure mid way through the song If you want to copy data into a measure that already contains data perform step recording in an empty track and use the Move Measure or Copy Measure menu commands See page 179 of the Parameter Guide If you want to edit or add to the recorded data you can use the Event Edit or Piano Roll function See pages 169 171 of the Parameter Guide Recording Recording multiple tracks from an external sequencer Recording multiple tracks from an external sequencer The playback from an external MI
311. ue When selecting a program or combination number in a dialog box you can also use the BANK button to enter the bank as an alternative to using the VALUE controllers 4 To execute press the OK button or the ENTER button If you decide not to execute press the Cancel or the EXIT button The dialog box will close 11 12 Introduction to the KROME Writing saving After editing you should write or save your changes as necessary For example if you ve edited a program your changes will be lost if you select another program or turn off the power The same applies to a combination Settings you edit in Global mode and songs will be remembered as long as the power is on but your changes will be lost when you turn off the power unless you write these changes into memory e You can write or save by pressing the WRITE button twice For more details on the Write operations see the following pages e Programs gt p 30 e Combinations gt p 47 e Effect presets gt PG p 67 e Global settings pages 0 4 gt p 116 e Drum kits gt p 116 e User arpeggio pattern gt p 116 e User Drum Track patterns gt p 103 Preset user Drum Track patterns are saved in internal memory even when the power is turned off Patterns that you create in Sequencer mode can be converted into user Drum Track patterns and saved in internal memory e User template songs gt PG p 164 Preset user template songs are saved in internal
312. um Pattern Pattern Preset P039 8 Beat Pop 1 All Shift 06 Trigger Mode gt TEESE Sync On Latch On Zone Keyboard Bottom C 1 Top G9 Velocity Bottom 001 Top 127 eau 4 If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger specify the Latch setting Latch specifies whether the Drum Track pattern will continue playing even after you take your hand off the keyboard Off If the DRUM TRACK button is on the LED will blink the pattern will start when you play the keyboard note on The pattern will stop when you release the keyboard note off On If the DRUM TRACK button is on the LED will blink the pattern will start when you play the keyboard note on The pattern will continue when you release the keyboard note off The pattern will stop when you turn the DRUM TRACK button off the LED will go dark 5 If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger specify the Keyboard Zone and Velocity Zone These settings specify the range of keys and velocities that will trigger the Drum Track pattern when you play the keyboard or receive a note on Saving the on off status If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger the drum track s on off status can be saved in the program If Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately the drum track s on off status will always be saved as off regardless of the state of the DRUM TRACK button EQ adjustments for the Drum
313. understandable The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th note COMBI Aaaa L C R BPM Delay Germ ch Gch BPM MIDI Time Over L Delay Base Note f Times Level 20 C Delay Base Note d Times x1 Level 20 R Delay Base Note D Times x1 Level 20 Feedback C Delay 10 Src off Amt 30 High Damp Low Damp 7 Src Js Y 01 Input Level D mod Spread 50 Wet Dry Src off Routing Routing IFX FXControl FXControl Pesta one ee me Tone oe T 8 Rotate the TEMPO knob and the delay time will change When you push the joystick away from yourself and press the SW1 button the feedback level will rise and the delays will become longer 9 When you turn on the ARP button arpeggiator will begin playing Select any desired arpeggiator When you rotate the TEMPO knob the delay time will change in synchronization with the changing tempo of the arpeggiator amp Depending on the specific delay effect you may hear some unexpected noise if you change the tempo while the delay is sounding This is because the delay sound becomes discontinuous and is not a malfunction M For some effects you can synchronize the LFO frequency to the tempo Set the effect parameters MIDI Sync to On and BPM to MIDI For details please see page 236 of the Parameter Guide Common FX LFO Two Common FX LFOs are available for modulation effects such as choruses filters
314. ur input and exit the text edit 117 118 Loading amp saving data Saving to SD card Media Save For details on the data that can be saved on storage media For details please see Saving data on page 113 amp The musical data of a song you create in Sequencer mode cannot be saved in the KROME s internal memory You must save this data on a commercially available SD card or save it using MIDI data dump When you ve come up with settings you like it s a good idea to save them so that even if you subsequently edit those settings you ll always be able to reload the previous settings if desired Types of SD card you can use SD card specifications SD memory cards up to 2GB and SDHC memory cards up to 32GB are supported SDXC memory cards are not supported MS DOS format FAT16 or FAT32 are supported amp Media is not included You will need to purchase it separately Inserting removing a card in the SD card slot If you ve placed an SD card in the SD card slot you can use it to save or load various types of Program Combination and Song data About the write protect setting of an SD card SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data from being overwritten accidentally and lost If you set the card s Lock write protect switch to the protected setting it will be impossible to write or erase data on the card or to format it If you need to save edited data on the card
315. urface to adjust the Filter cutoff or resonance You can also use it to vary the depth of an effect or to change the way in which the arpeggiator generates a phrase For details please see Realtime control knobs on page 25 Saving a Combination you ve edited After you ve edited a combination you must save it if you want to keep the changes you ve made If you re select the combination or turn off the power before saving your edits will be lost 1 Press the WRITE button The Write Combination dialog box will appear If you want to change the writing destination or the name make the appropriate changes see page 117 2 Press the WRITE button once again to save write the data For details please see Writing a Program or Combination on page 115 You can also save combinations on an SD card as PCG files For details please see Saving to SD card Media Save on page 118 Detailed Editing with Combinations You can edit the preloaded combinations Banks A C that the KROME is shipped with or start with an initialized Combination to create your own original sounds You can use the factory Programs to create new Combinations or use your own custom Programs Note If you re in the process of editing a Program in Program mode and you use that Program ina Combination you ll hear the edited version in Combination mode as well Combination structure and corresponding pages Routing
316. ve you could set the velocity zones of the two Timbres so that they partially overlap Then set the Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64 49 50 Playing and editing Combinations MIDI settings Timbre Parameters MIDI page Status This controls the status of MIDI and the internal tone generator for each Timbre Normally if you re playing an internal Program this should be set to INT If the status is set to Off EXT or EX2 that Timbre s internal sounds will not be played Off simply disables the Timbre entirely The EXT and EX2 settings allow the Timbre to control an external MIDI device _v J COMBI RMB gee MIDI T61 68 AOOO Piano amp Strings T 2 AGGG KROME Grand Piano Ch Gch Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Status OinT OINT OINT OINT GOIN OGOINT GOIN SOIT MIDI Channel Gch Gch Gch 02 02 02 02 02 J 120 00 Bank Select When Status EX2 MIDI Scale Scale 1 8 1 8 9 16 i fs f f A fA A For details please see Status on page 81 of the Parameter Guide Bank Select when status EX2 When the Status is set to EX2 these parameters allow you to transmit MIDI Bank Select messages to external MIDI devices MIDI Channel Timbres that you wish to play from the KROME s keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard i
317. ver the middle of the keyboard and then open more slowly or not at all in the higher octaves e Make the cutoff frequency increase as you play lower on the keyboard e Create abrupt changes at certain keys for split like effects How Key Track works Keys and Ramps The keyboard tracking works by creating four ramps or slopes between five keys on the keyboard For details please see How it works Keys and Ramps on page 28 of the Parameter Guide 39 40 Playing and editing Programs Using the Amp section The Amp section includes controls for volume pan and the driver circuit You can control the volume using the Amp EG LFO 1 2 Key Track and velocity along with other AMS sources Each Oscillator has its own Amp section Amp1 for OSC1 and Amp2 for OSC2 Background what does Amp mean Different sounds have characteristic shapes to their volume levels For example the volume of a piano note begins at a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note on the other hand remains constant as long as you continue pressing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instrument can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Volume Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant until note is released Volume decays gradually Time Tim
318. way that it affects the filters is controlled by the parameters described below on the Filter1 2 Modulation page PROG D S Filter EG Velocity to A 00 Velocity to B 0 Filter Modulation v O Intensity to A 8 AMS JS Y CC 02 Intensity to B Int to A 0 to B 00 S Filter A B Modulation Filter A AMS1 LATTIAA an AMS2 Off Intensity 00 Intensity 00 Filter B AMS1 us X AMS2 Off Intensity 00 f fa A Af gt f The Intensity to A and Intensity to B settings control the basic amount of EG modulation for filter frequencies A and B respectively before other modulation Intensity 00 The Velocity to A and Velocity to B settings let you use velocity to control the amount of EG modulation The AMS setting selects an AMS modulation source to scale the amount of the Filter EG applied to Filters A and B The two filters share a single AMS source with separate intensity Into A or to B settings LFO modulation You can modulate the filter via LFO1 LFO2 and the Common LFO Among other applications LFO modulation of the filter can produce the classic auto wah effect The Filter1 2 LFO Mod page lets you set up the following parameters separately for each LFO Filter LFO Mod vV JO Intensity to B 00 JS Y Intensity to B 00 Int to A 88 Int to B 00 Intensity to B 00 JS Y Intensity to B 00 Int to A 80 Int to B 00 P3 Filte
319. y and Bottom Key parameters are set so that arpeggiator B will run only for the notes B3 and below Arpeggiator A is set to run for any key COMBI LAR GD A005 Boom Pow Pad ARP Scan Zone VY G S Scan Zone A Top Key Bottom key C 1 Top Velocity 127 Bottom Velocity 001 B Top Key Bottom key C 1 Top Velocity 127 Bottom Velocity 001 Drum Track e The drum programs of timbres 1 4 use the same arpeggiator A pattern but since the notes sounded by each timbre are divided by key zone each will play only a portion of the arpeggiator pattern Go to the P0 Play Program T01 08 page and try muting each timbre 1 4 to hear the result You can add variety by using different combinations of timbres Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes In Combination and Sequencer modes you can use use two arpeggio patterns simultaneously thanks to the KROME s dual arpeggiator functionality The settings in each of these modes are adjusted in a similar way The following example shows how to adjust settings in Combination mode The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the following things e Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre Choose from Off arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B step 5 e Independently specify whether A and B will function step 6 e Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters independently for A and B step 7 e Make Scan Zone page settings so that you ca
320. y the edit region 1 T01 E091 SESE Kiti Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign 1 an ee 001 To END of MEASURE 001 z 3 4 5 N zi a Lad g 4 f F A E e Setup a 3 Press the tool 4 Press measure 5 the move destination measure Alternatively drag the edit region to measure 5 T01 E 91 HEIs Kiti Ch 01 RPPR NoAssign ooo 1 ap se oo1 To END of MEASURE 002 a 4 5 5 NI a lal g f e F a Q Indicate the selected region Linked with the identically named parameter of the Track Edit page Scroll button Tool box T 2 A 3 KROME Grand Parjo Track View area select a FRONI MEAS URE 1002 The bar at left indicates the four tracks shown in the track view area in this example tracks 1 4 Sumiuneuhi f Scroll button 4 Setup i Press this button to open dialog box gt Track View Setup Displays note events in a one octave range gt Track View Setup Selected region Velocity indication gt Track View Setup zh 02 YePR NoAssign Specify the starting To ENof MEASURE 003 ene 4 5 B N Nj a Specify the ending Al measure 4 Move the events of the Ki ES selected measure s gt ai Copy the events of the pa selected measure s A PBA Erase the events of the Q selected measure s Setup _ J the Track View Setup Setup gt Jump
321. ystick inal Normally controls Name Bich bend down Pitch bend up Up away from yourself Down towards yourself Filter LFO wah For details please see page 82 Joystick Lock This function lets you maintain the effect that had been applied prior to releasing your hand from the joystick You can use the SW1 SW2 buttons or a foot switch connected to the KROME to lock the current position so that the effect will continue even after the joystick returns to the center position For details please see Locking the Joystick on page 25 SW1 SW2 You can use these buttons to control program parameters via AMS Alternate Modulation or effect parameters via Dmod Dynamic Modulation They can also transpose the keyboard by octaves turn portamento on off or to lock the position joystick Each button can work as either a Toggle or Momentary button In Toggle mode the assigned function is switched between on and off each time the button is pressed In Momentary mode the assigned function is active on only as long as you hold down the button In Program mode you can check the assignments of SW1 and SW2 on the Prog PO Play Main page For details please see Program information on page 24 When you write a Program or Combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 buttons is saved For details please see page 82 Locking the Joystick 1 Using the standard factory sounds select Program C027

KROME Operation Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents